JP7355693B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated.

This type of gaming machine includes, for example, a side display device (movable body) provided on the left and right sides of a gaming area that is rotatable about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction (for example, Patent Document 1 (see, for example, Patent Document 2), and those in which a plurality of character accessories (movable bodies) are movable and rotatable.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-192165 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-187153

In the gaming machines described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there is room for improvement in the operation of the movable body.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game through the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that variably displays production identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display;
a first movable body corresponding to the first character display; a second movable body provided at a different position from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display; the first movable body and the second movable body. a plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display;
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance after the variable display of the performance identification information becomes a ready state;
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the first character toward a position where the first movable body is provided, and then operating the first movable body;
a second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the second character toward a position where the second movable body is provided, and then operating the second movable body;
a third predetermined effect of moving and displaying the third character toward a position where the third movable body is provided, and then operating the third movable body;
is executable,
A case where the first predetermined effect is executed but the second predetermined effect and the third predetermined effect are not executed, and a case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed but the third predetermined effect The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different depending on when the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed.
The operations performed by the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body in the predetermined performance are the same,
The first movable body and the first character display have a common first color, the second movable body and the second character display have a common second color, and the third movable body and the second character display have a common first color. 3-character display is a common third color,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved by a plurality of predetermined performances in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to claim 2,
A gaming machine that variably displays production identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display;
a first movable body corresponding to the first character display; a second movable body provided at a different position from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display; the first movable body and the second movable body. a plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display;
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance after the variable display of the performance identification information becomes a ready state;
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first predetermined effect of operating the first movable body and then moving and displaying the first character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the first movable body;
a second predetermined effect of operating the second movable body and then moving and displaying the second character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the second movable body;
a third predetermined effect of operating the third movable body and then moving and displaying the third character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the third movable body;
is executable,
A case where the first predetermined effect is executed but the second predetermined effect and the third predetermined effect are not executed, and a case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed but the third predetermined effect The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different depending on when the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed.
The operations performed by the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body in the predetermined performance are the same,
The first movable body and the first character display have a common first color, the second movable body and the second character display have a common second color, and the third movable body and the second character display have a common first color. 3-character display is a common third color,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved by a plurality of predetermined performances in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine with characteristic part 038SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in an effect control board. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a small hit type determination table, and a jackpot type. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start processing. It is a flowchart which shows cut-in performance type determination processing. (A) is a front view showing the opening/closing door frame in a state in which the movable body of each production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) in a state in which it is located in the production position. (A) is a plan view showing the opening/closing door frame in a state in which the movable body of each production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) in a state in which it is located in the production position. (A) is a diagram showing the execution period and structure of SP ready-to-reach effect A corresponding to SP reach α, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution period and structure of SP ready-to-reach effect B corresponding to SP reach β. (A) is an explanatory diagram of SP reach effects A and B, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing character types. It is a diagram showing the flow (outline) of SP reach effect A. It is a diagram showing the flow (outline) of SP reach effect B. This is an example of performance operation showing the flow from performance parts N2-0 to SP2-4 of SP reach performance B. This is an example of performance operation showing the flow of SP reach performance B from performance parts N2-5 to SP2-8. This is an example of performance operation showing the flow from performance parts N2-9 to SP2-11 of SP reach performance B. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-2, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-3. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-6, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-7. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-10. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the wing operation control data based on the extended command D033, and (B) and (C) are the contents of the control data in (A). (A) is character panel motion control data based on the extended command D033, and (B), (C), and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the contents of the control data in (A). It is a figure which shows the operation control data of a wing based on extended command D036. It is a figure which shows the motion control data of the character panel based on the extended command D036. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing motion control data of a character panel based on an extended command D008. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of wing operation control data based on the extended command D033. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of character panel motion control data based on the extended command D033. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of wing operation control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of character panel motion control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of character panel motion control data based on the extended command D008. (A) is a diagram showing the wing and character panel described in the control data, (B) is a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used to control the movement of the wing, and (C) is the movement of the character panel. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used for control. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of cut-in performance based on the performance pattern CP-4, and (B) is a diagram comparing the colors of the character panel LED and the cut-in image. (A) to (H) are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of the cut-in performance based on the performance pattern CP-4. (A) to (H) are diagrams illustrating an example of a production operation of a cut-in production as a first modification of the characteristic part 038SG.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 038SG form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 038SG),
A plurality of movable bodies including a first movable body (for example, wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and a second movable body (for example, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D);
A movable body control means capable of controlling the plurality of movable bodies (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D);
Equipped with
The movable body control means includes:
In the first scene in the specific performance, the first control data table is used to control the movable body (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs Based on the control data table shown in -24 and FIG. 11-25, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in conjunction with each other in accordance with the rhythm of the performance sound. (See (A)),
In the second scene in the specific performance, the movable body is controlled using the second control data table (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the following in the performance part SP2-2 of the SP reach performance B, Based on the control data table shown in FIG. 11-23, during the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of each image A-1Z to A-4Z, the enlarged and displayed images A-1Z to A-4Z A part that individually rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to -4Z (see Figure 11-19(A)),
The first control data table is composed of control data for performing an operation corresponding to the effect sound output during the specific effect (see FIG. 11-30),
The second control data table is composed of control data for performing an operation corresponding to a specific display displayed during the specific performance (see FIG. 11-28),
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, the final control data is control data that does not operate the movable body (for example, "6000000, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]" when rotating the rotating part 038SG401A). control data for stopping, etc.),
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, for control data other than the final control data, the next control data is used by counting the period set in the control data,
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, when a specific condition is satisfied before the period set in the final control data is timed, the final control data is no longer used (e.g. , for control data different from the final control data in each control data table, the performance control CPU 120 uses a control timer (for example, a parent timer counter (parent TC) described later) that can time the control period in which each control data is used. When the child timer counter (child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandchild TC), etc.) is timed up, the control data using each control data is ended by changing to the next control data. The control includes a portion in which, if a specific condition is met before a control timer capable of measuring the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up, the control period is ended when the specific condition is met. 11-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of a specific performance can be improved by the movement of the movable body, and if a specific condition is satisfied during control based on the final control data, the control is terminated, so problems such as abnormal movement of the movable body can occur. Since it is possible to use control data with a long control period as the final control data for controlling the movable body so that it does not operate, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The control data table includes a lower control data table (for example, a grandchild control data table or a child control data table) and a control data table higher than the lower control data table, and includes a control data table for which the lower control data table is used. A plurality of control data tables including a higher control data table (for example, a child control data table or a parent control data table) in which a period and a storage address of the lower control data table are determined,
The specific condition includes that the control timer of the upper control data table is timed up during the control period using the final control data of the lower control data table (for example, the production control CPU 120 When the timer is up (child TCA=0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter is not up (parent TC>0), the grandchild control data table 038SG821B written in the child control data table 038SG822A, The part that sequentially executes control based on the control data of 038SG821D (see Figure 11-29),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by controlling multiple lower-level control data tables with a higher-level control data table, if you want to partially change a series of movements of a movable object, you only need to change one lower-level control data table. This makes it easier to respond to problems that occur. Moreover, since it becomes possible to use control data with a long control period as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
The control data table includes a lower control data table (for example, a grandchild control data table or a child control data table) and a control data table higher than the lower control data table, and includes a control data table for which the lower control data table is used. A plurality of control data tables including a higher control data table (for example, a child control data table or a parent control data table) in which a period and a storage address of the lower control data table are determined,
The specific condition includes that the upper control data table is switched in accordance with the switching display of the image on the display means during the control period using the final control data of the lower control data table (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 However, if the child timer counter has timed up (grandchild TCA>0, child TC=0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter has not timed up (parent TC>0), the specific condition is met. Assuming that, depending on the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched and displayed from SP2-3A to SP2-3B), the control described next in the child control data table 038SG802 Parts that transition (change) to data control, etc. (see Figure 11-27),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by controlling multiple lower-level control data tables with a higher-level control data table, if you want to partially change a series of movements of a movable object, you only need to change one lower-level control data table. This makes it easier to respond to problems that occur. Moreover, since it becomes possible to use control data with a long control period as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The control data table is
Lower control data tables (for example, grandchild control data tables 038SG801A, 038SG801B, 038SG821A to 038SG821D, etc.),
An intermediate control data table (for example, child control data table 038SG802, 038SG822A to 038SG822C, etc.),
A control data table higher than the intermediate control data table, in which a control period in which the intermediate control data table is used and a storage address of the intermediate control data table are defined ( For example, parent control data table 038SG803, 038SG823, etc.)
including;
For the control data in the lower control data table, a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one step operation, and an operation upper limit are defined (for example, FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11- 24),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by controlling the lower control data table with the upper control data table, if you want to partially change the series of movements of the movable object, you only need to change the lower control data table. This makes it easier to respond to problems that occur.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The final control data of the lower-level control data table, the middle-level control data table, and the higher-level control data table have a period longer than any control data different from the final control data, and have the same special control period ( For example, 6000000ms (100 minutes) or 600000ms (10 minutes) is set (see Figures 11-22 and 11-24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to use control data with a long control period as the final control data for each layer, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) includes a first performance period (for example, performance part SP2-1) and a second performance period (for example, performance parts SP2-2 to SP2-3),
What is the background image (for example, black screen display, etc.) displayed on the display means during the first presentation period and the background image (for example, enlarged display, etc.) displayed on the display means during the second presentation period? Unlike,
In the first production period, the movable body does not operate because the movable body control information (for example, extended command D033, etc.) for operating the movable body (for example, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) is not set. No (see Figure 11-16),
In the second performance period, the movable body control information (for example, extended command D033, etc.) common to the first movable body and the second movable body is set, so that the movable body control information is set. Special control using control data according to the information is executed (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes operation control based on the control data shown in FIG. 11-23),
In the special control, one of the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D) is operated from the start of the second performance period. However, the other movable bodies (for example, wings 038SG221, 038SG321) do not operate from the start of the second performance period, and operate after a predetermined period has passed from the start (for example, from the performance part SP2-3 to wing 038SG221, The part where 038SG321 opens and closes),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the control information for the movable body is not set during a performance period in which the movable body is not operated, such as the first performance period, and is common to the first movable body and the second movable body during the second performance period. By setting the movable body control information, stable operation can be achieved.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The second movable body is composed of an operable first predetermined movable part (for example, the rotating part 038SG401A or the rotating part 038SG401C) and a second predetermined movable part (for example, the rotating part 038SG401B or the rotating part 038SG401D),
When operating the first predetermined movable section and the second predetermined movable section individually, first control data for operating the first predetermined movable section and second control data for operating the second predetermined movable section are provided. are set (for example, the parent control data table 038SG813A for operating the rotation unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, the parent control data table 038SG813B for operating the rotation unit 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B, and the rotation unit of the character panel 038SG400C). A part where the parent control data table 038SG813C for operating the 038SG401C and the parent control data table 038SG813D for operating the rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D are set separately (see Figure 11-23),
When the first predetermined movable part and the second predetermined movable part are operated in common, the first control data is set, the second control data is not set, and the first control data is used. The first predetermined movable part and the second predetermined movable part operate in common by being As a result, the rotating part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C also rotates together.In addition, the parent control data table 038SG843 contains control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B. is set, the rotating part 038SG401D of the lower right character panel 038SG400D also rotates together (see Figure 11-25),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, individual control data is used when operating the devices individually, and only one control data is used when operating the devices in common, thereby making it possible to reduce data capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
As a performance that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), the specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) and the performance that is controlled to the advantageous state more than the specific performance are It is possible to perform special effects (for example, SP reach effect A) that have a low rate of
In the specific performance and the special performance, it is possible to perform a notification performance (for example, a decision performance, etc.) that notifies whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
The movable body control means does not operate the first movable body and the second movable body in the special performance until the notification performance is started (see FIG. 11-13(A));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the specific performance, the first movable body and the second movable body perform actions that are not executed in the special performance, thereby increasing expectations for an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine described in Form 8,
The movable body control means controls the advantageous state (for example, jackpot) in the specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) and the special performance (for example, SP reach performance A) in the notification performance (for example, decisive performance). When notifying that the game state is controlled, at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is operated (for example, in the production parts SP1-4 and SP2-10, the character The part where the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a special performance, the movable body does not move until the notification performance, but when announcing that it will be controlled in an advantageous state, it performs the same action as the specific performance, which can improve interest. .

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
Special movable bodies (for example, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D),
A movable body control means capable of controlling the special movable body (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 can execute operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D);
Equipped with
The movable body control means includes:
In the first scene, the special movable body is controlled using the first control data table (for example, the performance control CPU 120 uses the control data table shown in FIG. 11-25 in the performance parts SP2-6 to SP2-8). (See Figures 11-20 to 11-21 (A)),
In the second scene, the special movable body is controlled using the second control data table (for example, the performance control CPU 120 uses the control data table shown in FIG. 11-23 in the performance part SP2-2, The part that executes operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the second movement pattern (display alignment), etc. (see Figure 11-19 (A)),
In the third scene, the special movable body is controlled using the third control data table (for example, the performance control CPU 120 uses the control data table shown in FIG. 11-26 in the performance part SP2-10, A part that executes motion control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in a third motion pattern (coordination of motion of the movable body 32, etc. (see FIG. 11-21(B)),
The first control data table is composed of control data for performing a first action corresponding to the sound effect (see FIG. 11-30),
The second control data table includes control data for performing a second operation corresponding to a specific display (see FIG. 11-28),
The third control data table includes control data for performing an operation different from the first operation and the second operation (see FIG. 11-31),
The first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table all include first common control data (for example, control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CW") that causes the special movable body to perform the first operation, second common control data (for example, control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CCW") for causing the special movable body to perform the second operation;
In each of the first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table, the first common control data and the second common control data are used for different times (FIG. 11-32 (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by realizing a large number of operation patterns through time management while using common control data, it is possible to reduce data capacity and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 10,
The movable body control means executes operation control of the first operation, operation control of the second operation, and operation control of the third operation in the special performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the SP reach performance B In the SP reach effect (strongest), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated in the first movement pattern, the second movement pattern, and the third movement pattern (see Figure 11-13),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movable body can be operated in a variety of patterns in one performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
Equipped with a variable display means (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols) capable of executing variable display,
The special effect can be executed during the execution period of the variable display (see FIGS. 11-12),
The movable body control means can execute the operation control of the third operation pattern before the execution period of the special effect in the execution period of the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform the SP reach effect ( In the production part N2-0 before (the strongest), the rotation parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be made operable in the third movement pattern based on the extended command D008. Modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in various situations while reducing the data capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The movable body control means can execute the operation control of the third operation without making it correspond to either the rhythm of the effect sound or the effect display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation of the image display device 5). A portion that can execute motion control based on a third motion pattern that rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the fall of the movable body 32 based on motion control execution data of process data, regardless of image display or sound output. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, chance button 631B and button sensor 635B) capable of detecting the player's motion,
The movable body control means includes:
The motion control of the first motion and the motion control of the second motion can be executed without depending on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means,
The operation control of the third operation can be executed based on the detection of the player's operation by the operation detection means (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 is a jackpot as the variable display result, the operation control of the chance button 631B At the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid period, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B, the determined performance is executed, and the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. (a portion capable of executing operation control based on a third operation pattern of rotating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in synchronization with the timing of movement),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 14,
The special movable body includes a plurality of special movable bodies (for example, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D),
The movable body control means includes:
When operating the plurality of special movable bodies all at once, at least one of the operation control of the first operation and the operation control of the third operation is executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the first operation pattern and the third operation). a part in which rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated all at once in the third operation pattern),
When operating the plurality of special movable bodies individually, execute the operation control of the second operation (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 individually rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the second operation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each special movable body can be individually operated in accordance with the effect display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
At least a first character display (for example, image A-1Z of ally A-1), a second character display different from the first character display (for example, image A-2Z of ally A-2), and the second character display. display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a third character display (for example, image A-3Z of ally A-3) different from the third character;
A first predetermined movable body (for example, rotating part 038SG401A of character panel 038SG400A) corresponding to the first character display, and a second predetermined movable body provided at a different position from the first predetermined movable body and corresponding to the second character display. A movable body (for example, the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B), a third predetermined movable body (for example, , the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C), and a plurality of predetermined movable bodies,
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect),
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
A first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the first character toward a position where the first predetermined movable body is provided and then operating the first predetermined movable body (FIGS. 11-33 (A1) (A2) , see Figure 11-34) and
A second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the second character toward a position where the second predetermined movable body is provided and then operating the second predetermined movable body (FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4) , see Figure 11-34) and
A third predetermined effect of moving and displaying the third character toward a position where the third predetermined movable body is provided and then operating the third predetermined movable body (FIGS. 11-33 (A5) (A6) , see Figure 11-34) and
is executable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved by a plurality of predetermined performances in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
At least a first character display (for example, image A-1Z of ally A-1), a second character display different from the first character display (for example, image A-2Z of ally A-2), and the second character display. display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a third character display (for example, image A-3Z of ally A-3) different from the third character;
A first predetermined movable body (for example, rotating part 038SG401A of character panel 038SG400A) corresponding to the first character display, and a second predetermined movable body provided at a different position from the first predetermined movable body and corresponding to the second character display. A movable body (for example, the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B), a third predetermined movable body (for example, , the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C), and a plurality of predetermined movable bodies,
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect),
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
A first predetermined effect (FIG. 11-33 (A1) (A2) in which the first predetermined movable body is operated and the first character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from a position corresponding to the first predetermined movable body. ), see Figure 11-35) and
A second predetermined effect (FIG. 11-33 (A3) (A4) in which the second predetermined movable body is operated and then the second character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from a position corresponding to the second predetermined movable body. ), see Figure 11-35) and
A third predetermined effect (FIG. 11-33 (A5) (A6) in which the third predetermined movable body is operated and then the third character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from the position corresponding to the third predetermined movable body. ), see Figure 11-35) and
is executable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved by a plurality of predetermined performances in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
The predetermined performance execution means is capable of sequentially executing the first predetermined performance, the second predetermined performance, and the third predetermined performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance patterns CP-3 and CP-4). parts on which cut-in effects can be performed based on)
When starting the second predetermined effect after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the first predetermined effect, the operation of the first predetermined movable body is stopped (for example, the effect control CPU 120 After completing the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401A and lighting of the character panel LED038SG404A while displaying 038SG601, the cut-in image 038SG602 is moved to the front side of the cut-in image 038SG601, as shown in Figure 11-33 (A3) (A4). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined movable body operated in the first predetermined effect stops when the second predetermined effect is started, attention can be drawn to the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 18,
The predetermined performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a notification performance (for example, a deciding performance) that informs whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player;
After executing the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect, the notification effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a cut-in effect in the effect part SP2-9). After execution, the part that executes the notification that the variable display result has become a jackpot or a loss in the production part SP2-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation before the notification performance.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
The predetermined performance execution means is capable of executing the predetermined performance as a performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player;
A case where the first predetermined effect is executed, a case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed, a case where the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed. The rate at which the above-mentioned advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the execution (for example, the jackpot expectation level of the cut-in production type is different from that of pattern CP-1, pattern CP-2, pattern CP-3, and pattern CP-4). (Jackpot expectation; pattern CP-1 < pattern CP-2 < pattern CP-3 < pattern CP-4), etc. (see Figure 11-9 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the number of predetermined effects to be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
The plurality of predetermined movable bodies include a fourth predetermined movable body (for example, a rotating part 038SG401D of a character panel 038SG400D) corresponding to a fourth character display different from the third character display,
a first opening/closing member (for example, wing 038SG221) that is provided with the first predetermined movable body and the second predetermined movable body and is capable of opening and closing operations;
a second opening/closing member (for example, wing 038SG321) which is provided with the third predetermined movable body and the fourth predetermined movable body and is capable of opening and closing operations;
Equipped with
The visibility of the plurality of predetermined movable bodies is higher when the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member are in an open state than when they are in a closed state (see FIG. 11-10);
When executing the predetermined effect, the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member are in the open state (for example, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect. FIG. 11- 33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, attention can be drawn to the movement of each predetermined movable body rather than the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing member or the second opening/closing member.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 21,
The first predetermined movable body (for example, the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A) and the first character display (for example, the image A-1Z) have a common first color (for example, blue, etc.), and the second The predetermined movable body (for example, the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B) and the second character display (for example, image A-2Z) have a common second color (for example, yellow, etc.), and the third predetermined movable body (For example, rotating part 038SG401C of character panel 038SG400C) and the third character display (for example, image A-3Z) have a common third color (for example, green, etc.) (see Figure 11-33(B)) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between each predetermined movable body and each character display can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, character panel LED038SG404A to 038SG404D) corresponding to each of the plurality of predetermined movable bodies,
The plurality of light emitting means can be turned off when the corresponding predetermined movable body is in a non-operating state, and can be turned on when the corresponding predetermined movable body is in an operating state (see FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each predetermined movable body can be made to stand out by emitting light.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 23,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of displaying a first corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG611) corresponding to the moving display of the first character display (for example, image A-1Z) in the first predetermined effect; In the second predetermined effect, a second corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG621) corresponding to the moving display of the second character display (for example, image A-2Z) can be displayed, and in the third predetermined effect, A third corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG631) corresponding to the moving display of the third character display (for example, images A-3Z) can be displayed,
The first correspondence display, the second correspondence display, and the third correspondence display are:
Each character display gradually becomes wider in the direction of moving display.
The first character display, the second character display, and the third character display are displayed in a manner extending in the same direction as the moving display direction (see FIG. 11-34);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the feeling of interlocking with the predetermined movable body can be suitably enhanced by the corresponding display corresponding to the movement display of each character display.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece becomes the winning ball. It approaches the device 6A and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed such game control main processing, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the origin position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 038SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 038SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 11-1 to 11-38. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in this feature section 038SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "038SGS1", and "Normal reach" is replaced by "N reach" and "Super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine having the characteristic part 038SG. The pachinko game machine 1 with characteristic part 038SG has an opening/closing door frame 50 which is attached to a game machine frame 3 which is removably equipped with a game board 2 on which a main board 11 and a production control board 12 are installed. A first production unit 038SG100 installed at the upper center position, a second production unit 038SG200 attached to the upper left side of the opening/closing door frame 50, and a third production unit attached to the upper right side of the opening/closing door frame 50. It has three production units of 038SG300. The opening/closing door frame 50 includes the glass door frame 3a, and is a door frame that can open and close the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, in the center of the lower part of the opening/closing door frame 50, there is an operation unit 600 equipped with a chance button 631B on the upper part and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled in the front and back directions by the player and is rotatably provided. In addition, a cross key constituting a selection button 038SG35 for making settings related to effects such as volume is provided on the upper plate.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 11-2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, as well as detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push/pull sensor 625Y consisting of a push sensor 625 (not shown) and a pull sensor (not shown) is provided, and a protrusion position sensor 625C is provided to detect that the lever body 631A is located in the protrusion position. There is. In addition, the selection button 038SG35 has an up/down/left/right sensor 038SG36 (see Figure 11-2) consisting of an upper sensor, a lower sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detect operations of the cross key of the selection button 038SG35 in the up, down, left, and right directions. It is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the first production unit 038SG100 is equipped with relatively high voltage DC power so that the drive power for operating the drive motor 038SG102 can be generated in each production unit 038SG100 to 038SG300. VSL as a primary power source is supplied from the power supply board.

Detection signals from the origin position sensor and performance position sensor provided in the first production unit 038SG100, second production unit 038SG200, and third production unit 038SG300, and the push/pull sensor of the operation unit 600 provided in the opening/closing door frame 50. 625Y, the protruding position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, and the detection signals of the top, bottom, left, and right sensors 038SG36 of the selection button 038SG35 are serial signals provided on the relay board (not shown) of each production unit 038SG100 to 038SG300 and the opening/closing door frame 50. The signals are converted into one serial signal by the signal conversion circuits A to E and input to the performance control CPU 120, so that the performance control CPU 120, which controls the performance, can grasp the detection status of each sensor. .

The first performance unit 038SG100 is provided with an elevating body 038SG121 that is movable between the origin position and the performance position by a drive means provided in the first performance unit 038SG100. In addition, the second production unit 038SG200 and the third production unit 038SG300 include a wing 038SG221 as a movable body (opening/closing body) attached to the opening/closing door frame 50 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction; 038SG321, and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D as movable bodies (rotating bodies) rotatably provided on the inner surface of each. Each production unit is provided with a drive motor for driving these movable bodies, an origin position sensor, a production position sensor, a frame LED, etc. for detecting whether the movable body is located at the origin position or production position. (See Figure 11-2).

In the display area of the image display device 5, a first pending storage display area 038SG005D and a second pending storage display area 038SG005U are arranged. In the first pending memory display area 038SG005D and the second pending memory display area 038SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol means that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) occurs based on the starting winnings. In other words, the starting conditions (also referred to as "execution conditions") for executing the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols have been met, but the variable display based on the previously established starting condition is currently being executed, or the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, and when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. The pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 038SG005D is a pending memory display that is generated based on the starting prize when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening, and is the pending memory display in the second pending memory display area 038SG005U. The pending memory display is a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In this feature section 038SG, a round white display (displayed in the first pending memory display area 038SG005D) indicates a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by a game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening. A round white display (displayed in the second pending memory display area 038SG005U) is used to display the pending memory display generated based on the starting prize when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. (reserved memory display). In addition, the pending memory display that occurred based on the starting winnings caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the starting winnings caused by the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the pending storage display that has occurred may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1, the number of special symbol pending memories is displayed at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B along with the first pending memory display area 038SG005D and the second pending memory display area 038SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying identifiably. The first reservation display 25A specifiably displays the number of stored first special symbols. The second reservation display 25B specifiably displays the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending memory number, which is the sum of the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, is particularly also referred to as the total pending memory number. When we simply say "number of reserved special symbols", it usually refers to a concept that includes the first number of reserved special symbols, the second number of reserved special symbols, and the total number of reserved memories, but in particular, some of these (e.g. It may also refer to a concept that includes the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, but excludes the total pending memory number.

On the right side of the winning ball device 6A, there is provided a special variable winning ball unit 038SG007 in which the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, and the variable winning ball device 6B are integrated. .

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007, the left side constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, and the right side constitutes the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a transparent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007, and the player can access the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. The game balls flowing down inside 038SG007, especially inside the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, can be visually recognized.

The first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A is equipped with a first big winning slot door 038SG701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 038SG082 (see Figure 11-2), and can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the first big winning slot door 038SG701. Forming the first big winning opening that changes. The first big prize opening is formed to open upward on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007. In addition, the first big winning opening door 038SG701 can be slid in the front and back direction between the closed position where the first winning opening is closed and the open position where the first winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 038SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the first big winning hole door 038SG701 opens the first big winning hole, and the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the first big winning hole door 038SG701 closes the first big winning hole, making it impossible for the game ball to pass through (enter) the first big winning hole. In this way, the first grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening. It's okay.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23 (see Figure 11-2) provided in the first big prize opening. be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of game balls by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first big winning hole in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A becomes open, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first grand prize opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the first big winning opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, most of the game balls flowing down the second path on the right side of the image display device 5 in the gaming area are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by obstacle nails etc. not shown, and even if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state. If so, the prize will be entered in the second starting prize slot.

The second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, and has a second big winning opening that is driven to open and close by the solenoid 83 (see Figure 11-2). A door 038SG711 is provided, and the second big winning opening door 038SG711 forms a second big winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B. The second big prize opening door 038SG711 is operated between a first state (open state) in which the second big prize mouth is opened by driving the solenoid 83 and a second state (closed state) in which the second big prize mouth is closed. It is provided so that it can be slid in the front and rear directions.

In the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, when the solenoid 83 for the second big winning hole door 038SG711 is in the on state, the second big winning hole door 038SG711 opens the second big winning hole, and the game ball Make it easier to pass (enter) the two major prize openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second grand prize opening door 038SG711 is in the off state, the second grand prize opening door 038SG711 closes the second grand prize opening, and the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening. Make it impossible to (enter). In this way, the second grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening is provided. It's okay.

The game ball passing through (entering) the second big winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 24A installed in the second big winning opening. Based on the detection of game balls by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second grand prize opening which is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, other ordinary winning holes such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, if the second big winning hole is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second grand prize opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the second grand prize opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, a game ball flow path is formed in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, through which the game ball that has passed through the second big prize opening can flow down. A third count switch 24B that can further detect the game balls that have passed through the second count switch 24A is installed in the game ball flow path. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. In addition, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branching path is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. It is detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B during the small winning game which will be described later, the gaming state after the small winning game is finished is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. There is.

In addition, the passage gate 41 in this characteristic part 038SG is installed above the 2nd special variable winning ball device 038SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007.

In this feature section 038SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at the approximate center position of the game area, and a right game area on the right side. A game ball that is hit weakly (hit to the left) with the batting operation handle flows down the left gaming area (first path), and a game ball that is hit strongly (hit to the right) by the batting operation handle flows down the right gaming area ( 2nd route).

In addition, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area can win prizes in the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B, the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, and the second special variable winning ball device 6B. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the winning ball device 038SG007B can win a prize and pass through the passage gate 41. In other words, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B cannot win and cannot pass through the passage gate 41.

(Configuration of display control unit 123)
As shown in FIG. 11-3, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives production control commands via the input circuit 260. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, based on the performance control command. Execute the process to

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the display control unit 123 displays characters as image element data used as sprite images (for example, ally characters A-1 to A-4, enemy characters X-1, X-2, etc., which will be described later). ), a decorative pattern, a background image, and a first reservation memory display area 038SG005D that specifiably displays the number of stored first special symbols as game-related information, and a second reservation that specifiably displays the number of stored second special symbols. A CGROM 205 in which data such as a first interface image and a second interface image including small designs for displaying the storage display area 038SG005U is stored, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area for display control. Configure the circuit.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which image data is stored in accordance with the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. This is a ROM for storing. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to instructions from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, such as character drawing order, number of colors, scaling ratio, an attribute register 203 that stores data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.; a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in the drawing area of the VRAM area; and a drawing control unit 206 that transfers CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area. A data transfer control unit 211 that performs control, video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) signals and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area of the VRAM area. This is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a video signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the production control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201C. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the production control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus, and can access the system register 202. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus, and can access the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions such as initial settings, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register that stores interrupt signal output instructions, a drawing area in the VRAM area, a palette data arrangement area, etc. A drawing register for storing a data transfer source address, a data transfer register for storing a transfer destination address, etc. during data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201C outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 every time a V blank (image update cycle) starts, and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this feature section 038SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

The feature section 038SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by, for example, superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the display is arranged. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a display image creation area for creating a display image is arranged in the VRAM area.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( This is an area where a synthesized image is created as a display image (display data) for displaying on the image display device 5.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

For example, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the layer 1 image drawing area specifies a first reservation memory display area 038SG005D that specifies the number of reserved first special symbols and a second number of reserved special symbols. In order to display a first interface image including a second reserved storage display area 038SG005U that can be displayed, and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decorative pattern at the top of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area where these images are drawn. The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns. The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

Images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 images), images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 images), and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority, so they are displayed as the uppermost image on the image display device 5. Images (decorative designs) drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area have a lower display priority than images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so they are displayed as middle-layer images on the image display device 5. The image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority and is therefore displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% in order to make the overlapping area of the upper layer image and the lower layer image invisible to the player when they are superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%. An image that is displayed transparently or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 also generates the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data (display data) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and When performing display processing that outputs image data (display data) as a video signal, it is used as control information for movable bodies to operate movable bodies such as wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Extended commands (for example, extended commands D033, D036, D008, etc. described later) and extended commands as lamp control information for turning on/off character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. ("X" An arbitrary number)) is generated and transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the extended commands D033, D036, and D008, the performance control CPU 120 performs operation control based on operation control execution data of the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D described in the process data described later. separately starts operation control to operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands D033, D036, and D008.

In addition, based on receiving the extended command BXXX, etc., the performance control CPU 120 executes the extended command BXXX separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D described in the process data described later. Control is started to turn on/off the character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D in a lighting pattern corresponding to the above.

Further, control data for operating the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is stored in the ROM 121.

(Summary of game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 038SG will be schematically explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol display 20, such as when a game ball that has passed through a passage gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 11-2. After the normal pattern start condition for execution is satisfied, the normal pattern start condition is established for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous variable display of the normal pattern. Variable display of common symbols by the symbol display device 20 is started.

In this variable display of ordinary symbols, after a predetermined period of time, which is the variable display time of ordinary symbols, has elapsed after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbols has started, the fixed ordinary symbols that are the variable display result of the ordinary symbols are stopped and displayed (derivative display). . At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "miss the regular symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", an enlarged opening control (opening control) is performed in which the movable piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 11-2, For example, based on the first start condition being satisfied due to the completion of the previous special symbol game or jackpot game state, variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 11-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display of the special symbol based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state. .

In the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time has elapsed, the special symbol A fixed special symbol (variable display result) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small win symbol) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small win" as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "miss".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as a specific game state in which rounds (also referred to as "round games") that are advantageous to the player are executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 038SG, as an example, special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are used as jackpot symbols, and special symbols showing the number "2" are used as small winning symbols. , a special symbol showing a "-" symbol is a missed symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, and a losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The common special symbol may be a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a loss symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, in the jackpot game state, the first big prize opening door of the first special variable prize ball device 038SG007A 038SG701 opens the first grand prize opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A is placed in the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Furthermore, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the game ball does not enter the first prize opening). Good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B The 2nd grand prize opening door 038SG711 opens the 2nd grand prize opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B enters the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, the second big prize opening door 038SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) passes in the small winning game state, but the present invention does not solve this problem. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening passes the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B. It will be a “jackpot” based on (V winning jackpot). In other words, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state based on detecting passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball.

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, the game ball that won the second grand prize opening always passes through the third count switch 24B. In other words, when a game ball enters the second big winning slot in the small winning game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 24B, and after the small winning game ends, the CPU 103 controls it to the jackpot gaming state. be done. In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, when the variable display result becomes a small win, the game ball enters the second big prize opening during the small win game, so that the control is always changed to the jackpot game state after the small win game ends. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passing of the third count switch 24B of the game ball, the second big winning opening door 038SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is opened for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second grand prize opening is kept open. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on passage of the third count switch 24B, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is controlled to the first state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "9", etc.). Furthermore, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the round game may end due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second grand prize opening). good.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state in this feature section 038SG, a time saving state in which time saving control is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time) or a normal state in which time-saving control is not performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on). The same control is performed as in the state in which the The time saving control is such that after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the game ball presses the third count switch 24B in the small win game state. It is only necessary to terminate when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state. , control to shorten the variable display time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol variable display time) by the ordinary symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and to control the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol each time to be "normal". Control to improve the probability of winning a figure than in the normal state, and the opening control time for controlling the opening of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being a “normal figure winning” There is a possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting prize opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control is performed that is advantageous for the player by increasing the value. In this way, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening due to the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed in combination.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second starting winning hole becomes open is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or "small win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 038SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A." Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B."

In addition, in this feature part 038SG, by providing a fifth variable display result designation command and a sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the performance control CPU 120 of the small winning type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although possible forms are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 indicates to the performance control CPU 120 that the variable display result is a "small win". It may also be possible to notify only this in advance before the start of variable display.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(C), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. Command 9504H is a fifth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game. Command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time saver state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot game state or the small win game state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 038SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 038SG005U etc. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V winning has been won, that is, the third count switch 24B has been turned on because the game ball has passed through the third count switch 24B. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this feature section 038SG, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data representing each of a numerical value MR3, a random numerical value MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random numerical value MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

FIG. 11-6 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 038SG. In this characteristic part 038SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit", when the variable display result is a "small win", etc. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A) and FIG. 11-6(B), in this characteristic part 038SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol that performs variable display.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), as the variation patterns of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the super reach α, and the super reach variation pattern. There is a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as β is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(A), among the first special symbol variation patterns in this feature part 038SG, the special symbol variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed, the super reach variation It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in this feature part 038SG is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 038SG, as mentioned above, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be high in which the variable display result becomes "jackpot" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation level (jackpot expectation level; super reach β > super reach α > normal reach).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in this feature part 038SG is a non-reach variation that has a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A pattern and a reach variation pattern are provided.

In addition, in this feature section 038SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 11-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and the table shown in FIG. 11-7 ( In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. (not shown), a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), a regular figure display result determination table (not shown), a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 11-7(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 1 (first), that is, Regarding the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the case where the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display. , a determination value for determining a jackpot, and a determination value for determining a small win are set.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, if the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only a jackpot can be won, and a small win will not be won.

In addition, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as in the case where the variable display special figure specification buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second Even when the special symbol is subject to variable display, a jackpot will occur with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and approximately 1/7 of these judgment values will be small. By setting the judgment value corresponding to a hit, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (ratio) of winning a small hit is approximately 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 11-7(A), it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control the small win game state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B a small win symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

In addition, in this feature section 038SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7(A) to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small hit. A separate small hit determination table is provided, and a common table is used to determine the jackpot regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer, whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol is variable display. The small hit determination may be performed using a separate table only when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second one.

In addition, in this feature section 038SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed to prevent winning, a portion of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small win, so that the small win may be won.

FIGS. 11-7(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, in Figure 11-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when In addition, in FIG. 11-7(C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this feature section 038SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B) and (C), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot C, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot C.

FIG. 11-7(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, if the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D is executed. If the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during a small winning game of small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot E is executed. It is supposed to be done. In other words, these jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but are played during the game of either small win A or small win B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing the third count switch 24B.

Here, to explain the jackpot type in this characteristic section 038SG using FIG. 11-7(E), in this characteristic section 038SG, as a jackpot type, jackpot A in which time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state ~Jackpot E is set.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A, one time-saving control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot B ends, the jackpot will be hit again until three special pattern games are executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until three special pattern games are executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot C ends, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, the jackpot will be hit again until the 7th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 7th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot E, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of getting a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in a normal state. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the time saving state and immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to one, so the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion, and the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion. The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the variable display result of the above five times in total) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to three, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the three times and the three times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the total of 7 times above) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 66%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 7, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 7 times and the 7 times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the above total of 11 times) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 82%.

In the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot games of jackpot C and jackpot E, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 99, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 99 times, The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the maximum 4 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol based on the retained memory that occur during the 99 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol (total of 103 The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of the second special symbol of the game and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to approximately 100%.

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, five types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, Moreover, four or less types may be provided.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table that is selected when the gaming state is normal, and includes a normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), For each of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined randomness is determined within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern determination table A is provided in which numerical values are assigned as determination values. In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table A, these judgment values indicate that when the type of jackpot is "Jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the type of jackpot is "Jackpot A", it is easy to determine the super reach β. is assigned in such a way that super reach α is easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of super reach β is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be a "jackpot B". .

Furthermore, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and is a variable pattern determination table for non-reach jackpot (PB1-4). ), there is provided a jackpot variation pattern determination table B in which all random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned as determination values.

In addition, the loss variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol includes a loss variation that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is one or less. A pattern determination table A, a variation pattern determination table B for losing which is selected when the gaming state is a normal state and the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and a case where the gaming state is a time saving state. A variation pattern determination table C for failure that is selected is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for a miss, there is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol being 3 or more, a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2). PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach α (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach β (PA2-3). A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for variation, all of the ranges that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the time saving control are shown. A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the variation time is shorter in the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-2) than in the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-6(A), the shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-3) selected during time saving control has a higher fluctuation than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2). Time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving control, the variable time is shorter than when the time saving control is not executed (when the gaming state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time saving control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control shown in FIG. 11-7 includes a first special figure holding storage section, a second special figure holding storage section, a regular figure holding storage section, a game control flag setting section, and a game control timer setting. , a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuating pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on , are held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 stores various data tables used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

For example, in the ROM 121, the performance control CPU 120 stores various performance devices (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, movable body 32, wings 038SG221, 038SG322, character panels 038SG400A~ A performance control pattern table is stored that stores a plurality of types of performance control patterns used to control performance operations by rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of 038SG400D, chance button 631B, lever body 631A, etc.). The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of a performance operation that is a preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different, for example, for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 is provided with, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 038SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning are used to carry out these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, and pending storage number notification command. In association with each other, storage areas (entries) are secured for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending storage in the starting winning reception command buffer at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning into the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending storage in the starting winning receiving command buffer. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- The data stored in the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1" is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special pattern pending memory ends in the stored state, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1". Each command is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" are shifted to the buffer number "3". , "4" are shifted to the regions corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 038SG, when the production control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received, and these If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the received command buffer at the time of start winning as a reserved memory of each special symbol.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 038SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 038SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 038SGS271 (step 038SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 038SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer for one buffer number. (Step 038SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 038SGS272 or step 038SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 038SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 038SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as an even number symbol as the stop symbol. A combination of decorative patterns (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "222", "444", "666", and "888") is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned as a "7" symbol is determined as the stop symbol. . In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to small win A or the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to small win B, the stop symbol is used as a chance eye. Decide from among "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, the stop symbol is a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance is selected. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is the super reach variation pattern of super reach β (step 038SGS277), and if it is not the super reach variation pattern of super reach β (step 038SGS277). ;N), proceed to step 038SGS283. Moreover, when it is a super reach variation pattern of super reach β (step 038SGS277; Y), after executing cut-in effect type determination processing to be described later (step 038SGS278), the process proceeds to step 038SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the cut-in performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (step 038SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, small win A, small win B, loss) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for performance determination (for example, 1 to 100), and uses the cut-in performance type determination table shown in FIG. 11-9(B) to decide whether to execute the cut-in performance or not. If the execution is determined, the cut-in effect type is determined (step 038SGS302).

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), in the cut-in performance type determination table, the variable display results are jackpot B, jackpot A, and loss, non-execution, and patterns CP-1, CP-2, and CP-3. , the number of judgment values assigned to CP-4 is different. Specifically, when the variable display result is jackpot B, 5 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern CP-1, and 15 determination values are assigned to pattern CP-2. is assigned, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern CP-3, and 40 decision values are assigned to pattern CP-4. In addition, when the variable display result is jackpot A, 5 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-1, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-2. , 40 decision values are assigned to pattern CP-3, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern CP-4. Further, when the variable display result is negative, 40 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-1, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-2, Ten determination values are assigned to pattern CP-3, and five determination values are assigned to pattern CP-4.

In this way, when the variable display result is jackpot B or jackpot A, patterns CP-3 and CP-4 are determined at a higher rate than when it is a loss, while when the variable display result is a loss. In this case, non-execution and patterns CP-1 and CP-2 are determined at a higher rate than when jackpot B and jackpot A occur. -4 comes to expect that the cut-in effect will be executed. In addition, when the variable display result becomes jackpot B, pattern CP-4 is determined at a higher rate than when jackpot A is obtained, which is less advantageous than jackpot B (less time saving control frequency), so the player The user comes to expect that a cut-in effect based on pattern CP-4 will be executed.

In other words, the jackpot expectation of cut-in production types increases in the order of pattern CP-1, pattern CP-2, pattern CP-3, and pattern CP-4 (jackpot expectation; pattern CP-1 < pattern CP- 2<Pattern CP-3<Pattern CP-4).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not execution of the cut-in effect has been decided (step 038SGS303), and if execution has not been decided (step 038SGS303; N), the process is immediately ended. If execution is determined (step 038SGS303; Y), the cut-in effect type determined in step 038SGS302 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 038SGS304). Then, a period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start wait timer (step 038SGS305), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 11-8, in step 038SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 038SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, motion control execution data for controlling the operations of movable bodies such as the movable body 32, wings 038SG221, 038SG321, and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and chance button 631B and lever body 631A. Operation unit control execution data for controlling operations, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, operation control execution data, and operating unit control execution data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value.

The process table is stored in the ROM in the production control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern. In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. You can.

Next, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device ( Image display device 5 as a production component, various lamps as production components, speakers 8L, 8R as production components, movable body (movable body 32, wings 038SG221, 038SG321, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D), operation unit ( The chance button 631B, lever body 631A, etc.) are controlled (step 038SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, in order to operate the movable bodies (movable body 32, wings 038SG221, 038SG321, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) and operation parts (chance button 631B, lever body 631A, etc.), a control signal (operation control execution data).

In addition, in this characteristic part 038SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 038SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 038SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the production control CPU 120 writes image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including image data that indicates the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right, into the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal according to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 038SGS288).

(Direction unit)
Next, the first presentation unit 038SG100, the second presentation unit 038SG200, and the third presentation unit 038SG300 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-10 to 11-11. FIGS. 11-10 are front views showing the opening/closing door frame in a state in which (A) the movable body of each production unit is located at the origin position and (B) in a state where it is located at the production position. FIGS. 11-11 are plan views showing the opening/closing door frame in a state in which (A) the movable body of each production unit is located at the origin position and (B) in a state where it is located at the production position.

(1st production unit 038SG100)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the first production unit 038SG100 includes a plate-shaped base member 038SG120, which is provided to protrude upward from the upper side of the opening/closing door frame 50, and a base member. It has an elevating body 038SG121 provided on the front side of 038SG120 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The elevating body 038SG121 is provided so that the player can contact it when the door is closed. Incidentally, the elevating body 038SG121 of the first effect unit 038SG100 is larger and heavier than the wing 038SG221 of the second effect unit 038SG200 and the wing 038SG321 of the third effect unit 038SG300, which will be described later.

The elevating body 038SG121 is attached to a plate-shaped movable base portion 038SG121A disposed on the front side of the base member 038SG120, and to the front surface of the movable base portion 038SG121A, and is attached to a movable base portion 038SG121A disposed on the front side of the base member 038SG120, and is attached to a movable base portion 038SG121A arranged on the front side of the base member 038SG120. ), and second decorative parts 038SG122L, 038SG122R, which are movably provided between the movable base part 038SG121A and the first decorative part 038SG121B and have a shape imitating the character's wings. , consists of.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the first production unit 038SG100 includes a drive motor 038SG102 for operating the elevating body 038SG121, and a movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the drive motor 038SG102 to the elevating body 038SG121. ), an origin position sensor 038SG103A for detecting that the elevating body 038SG121 is located at the origin position, a production position sensor 038SG103B for detecting that the elevating body 038SG121 is located at the production position, A production LED 038SG104A for making the light emitting part 038SG104 provided on the front side of the first decoration part 038SG121B emit light, a drive motor 038SG132 for operating the second decoration part 038SG122L, 038SG122R, and the power of the drive motor 038SG132 is applied to the left and right second decorations. A decorative part power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits to the parts 038SG122L and 038SG122R, an origin position sensor 038SG133A for detecting that the second decorative parts 038SG122L and 038SG122R are located at the original position, and a second decorative part It has a performance position sensor 038SG133B for detecting that 038SG122L, 038SG122R is located at the performance position, and a performance LED 038SG134A for causing the front light emitting parts of the second decoration parts 038SG122L, 038SG122R to emit light.

In this way, the elevating body 038SG121 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 11-10(A) and the production position shown in FIG. 11-10(B) at the upper front surface of the opening/closing door frame 50. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-10(A), there is a non-deployed mode in which the second decorative parts 038SG122L and 038SG122R are stored at the origin positions on the left and right sides of the back of the first decorative part 038SG121B, and As shown in B), the second decorative part 038SG122L, 038SG122R can be changed to a deployed state in which the second decorative part 038SG122L and 038SG122R protrude so as to spread to the production position above the left and right sides of the back surface of the first decorative part 038SG121B.

The movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG102 to the elevating body 038SG121 using a power transmission member such as a plurality of gear members. Although not particularly illustrated, among the plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG102 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear member is a worm gear. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and a third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the elevating object 038SG121 due to some reason (for example, a player or the like contacts the elevating object 038SG121 or moves it manually), and the external force is applied to the drive motor 038SG102 via a plurality of gear members. Even if the external force is transmitted to the drive motor 038SG102, the second gear member will not rotate due to the worm gear, and the third gear member will idle due to the clutch mechanism, so the external force will not be transmitted to the drive motor 038SG102. This prevents damage to gear members.

On the other hand, although not particularly shown, the decorative part power transmission mechanism (not shown) includes a first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG132 among a plurality of gear members, and a first gear member that meshes with the first gear member. The second gear member is a worm gear, and a clutch mechanism is provided between the second gear member and a third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the second decorative parts 038SG122L, 038SG122R due to some reason (for example, a player or the like contacts or moves the second decorative parts 038SG122L, 038SG122R with their hands), and the external force causes a plurality of external forces. Even if the external force is transmitted to the drive motor 038SG132 side via the gear member, the second gear member does not rotate due to the worm gear, and the third gear member idles due to the clutch mechanism, so that the external force is not transmitted to the drive motor 038SG132. Therefore, failure of the drive motor 038SG132 and damage to gear members can be prevented.

(Second production unit 038SG200)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the second production unit 038SG200 is rotatable about a rotation axis that faces in the vertical direction with respect to the base portion formed on the left side of the opening/closing door frame 50. The wing 038SG221 and the character panels 038SG400A, 038SG400C are provided so that the player can contact them. There is.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the second production unit 038SG200 includes a drive motor 038SG202 for operating the wing 038SG221, and a movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG202 to the wing 038SG221. , an origin position sensor 038SG203A for detecting that the wing 038SG221 is located at the origin position, a production position sensor 038SG203B for detecting that the wing 038SG221 is located at the production position, and a rotating part 038SG401A to be described later. , 038SG401C, and character panel LEDs 038SG404A, 038SG404C for causing the rotating parts 038SG401A, 038SG401C to emit light.

The wing 038SG221 has an origin position where it protrudes forward so as to be inclined towards the glass window 50W side (see Figures 11-10(A) and 11-11(A)), and an origin position where it projects forward so as to be inclined towards the side opposite to the glass window 50W. It is possible to rotate left and right around a rotation axis (not shown) that faces up and down between the forward-protruding production position (see Figures 11-10 (B) and 11-11 (B)). It is provided.

The movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG202 to the wing 038SG221 using a power transmission member such as a plurality of gear members. Although not particularly illustrated, among the plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG202 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear member is a worm gear. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and a third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the wing 038SG221 due to some reason (for example, a player or the like contacts the wing 038SG221 or moves it by hand), and the external force is applied to the drive motor 038SG202 side via a plurality of gear members. Even if the external force is transmitted, the second gear member will not rotate due to the worm gear, and the third gear member will idle due to the clutch mechanism, so that the external force will not be transmitted to the drive motor 038SG202. Damage to members is prevented.

(Third production unit 038SG300)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the third production unit 038SG300 is a plate-shaped plate that is rotatably provided in the left-right direction with respect to a base portion formed on the right side of the opening/closing door frame 50. It includes a wing 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400B and 038SG400D provided at upper and lower positions on the inner surface of the wing 038SG321, and the wing 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400B and 038SG400D are provided so that the player can contact them.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the third production unit 038SG300 includes a drive motor 038SG302 for operating the wing 038SG321, and a movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the drive motor 038SG302 to the wing 038SG321. , an origin position sensor 038SG303A for detecting that the wing 038SG321 is located at the origin position, a production position sensor 038SG303B for detecting that the wing 038SG321 is located at the production position, and a rotating part 038SG401B to be described later. , 038SG401D, and character panel LEDs 038SG404B, 038SG404D to cause the character panels 038SG400B, 038SG400D to emit light.

The wing 038SG321 has an origin position where it protrudes forward so as to be inclined towards the glass window 50W side (see FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-11(A)), and an origin position where it protrudes forward so as to be inclined towards the glass window 50W side, and an origin position where it is inclined towards the side opposite to the glass window 50W. It is possible to rotate left and right around a rotation axis (not shown) that faces up and down between the forward-protruding production position (see Figures 11-10 (B) and 11-11 (B)). It is provided.

The movable body power transmission mechanism (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG302 to the wing 038SG321 using a plurality of power transmission members such as gear members. Although not particularly illustrated, among the plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG302 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear member is a worm gear. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and a third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the wing 038SG321 due to some reason (for example, a player or the like touches the wing 038SG321 or moves it by hand), and the external force is applied to the drive motor 038SG302 side via a plurality of gear members. Even if the external force is transmitted, the second gear member will not rotate due to the worm gear, and the third gear member will idle due to the clutch mechanism, so the external force will not be transmitted to the drive motor 038SG302. Damage to members is prevented.

The left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 configured in this manner can be operated individually by respective drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302, and as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-11(A), each 11-10 (B ), see FIG. 11-11(B)). Further, the left and right drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are provided so that they change to a closed state by rotating clockwise, and change to an open state by rotating counterclockwise.

Additionally, the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are difficult to see from the player when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are in the closed state (see Figure 11-10 (A)), and when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are in the open state is provided so as to be visible to the player (see FIG. 11-10(B)).

As shown in FIG. 11-10(B), each character panel 038SG400A to 038SG400D has an annular rotating part 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body rotatably provided by each drive motor 038SG402A to 038SG402D, and an annular rotating part 038SG401A to 038SG401D. It is comprised of circular character display parts 038SG403A to 038SG403D, which are provided non-rotatably within 038SG401A to 038SG401D and display allies A-1 to A-4, which are later-described ally characters, respectively. In addition, each character panel 038SG400A to 038SG400D is made of a translucent material, and when the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D light up, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D and the character display parts 038SG403A to 038SG403D light up. There is.

In the characteristic section 038SG, only the rotating sections 038SG401A to 038SG401D provided around the character display sections 038SG403A to 038SG403D can be rotated, but the character display sections 038SG403A to 038SG403D are also rotated together with the rotating sections 038SG401A to 038SG401D. You can.

(Super reach performance)
Next, the super reach effect (hereinafter also referred to as SP reach effect) will be explained based on FIGS. 11-12 to 11-15. 11-12, (A) shows the execution period and structure of SP reach effect A corresponding to SP reach α, and (B) shows the execution period and structure of SP reach effect B corresponding to SP reach β. It is a diagram. 11-13, (A) is an explanatory diagram of SP reach effects A and B, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing character types. FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing the flow (outline) of SP reach effect A. FIG. 11-15 is a diagram showing the flow (outline) of SP reach effect B.

In the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then starts the normal reach performance as the variable display performance based on the variable display mode being set as the reach display mode. Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends with the normal reach performance without developing into the super reach performance.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and the super reach variation pattern of super reach β, after starting the variable display, Based on the variable display mode being set as the ready-to-reach display mode, SP ready-to-reach performance is started as the variable display performance. Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends with the SP reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-12 (A), in SP reach performance A based on the super reach variation pattern of super reach α, SP reach performance (weak) is performed in the first half, and then develops and SP reach performance in the second half. (Strong) is executed. In addition, for example, by executing a common effect between the normal reach effect and the first half SP reach effect (weak), in the case of normal reach, it will end without developing into super reach effect, and in the case of super reach, super reach effect ( Therefore, even if a normal reach performance is executed, the player can expect that the super reach performance (strong) will develop.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-12 (B), in SP reach effect B, the SP reach effect (strongest) is performed from the beginning for a longer period than the SP reach effect (weak) and SP reach effect (strong). executed to the end.

In addition, in the SP reach performance A based on the super reach variation pattern of super reach α, the performance control CPU 120 creates a development suggestion performance that suggests that the SP reach performance (strong) will develop as a performance different from the variable display performance. It is doable. In addition, in super reach performance B based on the super reach variation pattern of super reach β, there is a development suggestion performance that suggests that the performance will develop, and a possibility that the variable display result will become a jackpot ( It is possible to execute a cut-in effect that suggests the degree of expectation) and a decisive effect that informs whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss.

As shown in Figures 11-13 (A) and (B), SP reach performance A is a performance in which an ally character, ally A-4, and enemy characters, enemies X-1 and X-2, engage in a battle showdown. If ally A-4 defeats enemies X-1 and X-2, the variable display result will be announced as a jackpot, and if ally A-4 fails to defeat enemies X-1 and X-2, the result will be announced as a jackpot. , it is announced that the variable display result is a failure.

On the other hand, in SP Reach Production B, ally character A-4 fights together with fellow allies A-1 to A-3 to destroy the fortress of enemy characters X-1 and X-2. It is said to be a performance, and if you can destroy the enemy's fortress, you will be notified that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and if you are not able to destroy the enemy's fortress, you will be notified that the variable display result will be a loss.

As shown in Figure 11-13 (B), in SP reach effects A and B, multiple allies A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4 are set as ally characters that appear in the effects. In addition, a plurality of enemies X-1 and X-2 are set as enemy characters. Friendly characters are set to become stronger in the order of A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4, and enemy characters are set to become stronger in the order of enemy X-1 and X-2. . In other words, the expected jackpot when each character appears is set to increase in the order of A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4, and the enemy characters are It is set in increasing order.

In addition, in feature part 038SG, SP reach effect A was supposed to be a battle showdown between ally A-4 and enemy characters X-1 and X-2, but depending on the variable display results, The ally character to appear may be determined to be one of allies A-1 to A-4, and the enemy character to appear may be determined to be one of enemies X-1 and X-2. In addition, in SP reach performance B, all allies A-1 to A-4 appear, but depending on the variable display results, the ally character to appear is determined to be one of allies A-1 to A-4. Alternatively, enemies X-1 and X-2 may appear, or one of a plurality of types of fortresses with different display modes may be selected as the fortress.

Further, the number and display mode of ally characters and enemy characters can be changed in various ways, and ally characters and enemy characters other than those mentioned above may be set. Moreover, SP reach effects A and B may be effects in which these characters do not appear.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 (A), SP reach effects A and B are composed of a plurality of effect parts. SP reach performance A includes a performance part N1-0 from when the variable display starts until the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and production parts SP1-1 to SP1 that start after the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode. -5. In addition, SP reach performance B includes a performance part N2-0 from when the variable display starts until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and a performance part SP2-1 that starts after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. ~SP2-11.

First, an outline of the flow of SP reach performance A and an outline of each performance part will be explained based on FIGS. 11-13(A) and 11-14.

In N1-0, when the super reach variation pattern of SP reach α is determined as the variation pattern based on the occurrence of a starting winning, variable display of decorative symbols is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, although not shown in detail, after a preview performance indicating the expectation of a jackpot, a performance indicating the start of a battle showdown, etc. are executed, the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode.

In SP1-1, a battle confrontation between ally A-4 and enemy X-1 begins in the first stage (for example, the background is a city). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the battle, and after ally A-4 defeats enemy X-1, in SP1-2, the movable body 32 falls, resulting in SP reach effect (strong). A development-suggesting performance that suggests development is executed.

Next, in SP1-3, a battle confrontation between ally A-4 and new enemy X-2 begins in a second stage different from the first stage (for example, the background is a wilderness). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the battle showdown, an operation promotion display that promotes operation of the chance button 631B is started at SP1-4. The timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected during the period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, that is, the operation validity period of the chance button 631B, or the operation validity period ends without any operation of the chance button 631B being detected. A determined performance is executed at the right time. In the deciding performance, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed; if the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 moves to the performance position. 32 does not move from the origin position to the production position, and an image with cracked glass is displayed.

In SP1-5, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the image of ally A-1 winning the battle against enemy X-2 is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmation symbol is displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation. If the variable display result is a failure, a failure confirmation symbol will be displayed along with an image of cracked glass showing that ally A-1 has been defeated in a battle with enemy X-2. will be held.

It should be noted that performance parts SP1-1 to SP1-2 are executed in SP reach performance (weak), and performance parts SP1-3 to SP1-5 are executed in SP reach performance (strong).

In addition, in the production part N1-0, SP1-1 to SP1-3, the production control CPU 120 sets the operation control execution data of the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the process data. Furthermore, since the extension command is not received, the rotation parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D do not operate. Furthermore, when the expansion command D008 is received in the production part SP1-4, the operation control is performed to operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in a third operation pattern that operates in accordance with the falling motion of the movable body 32. In the production part SP1-5, operation control is executed to operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in a fourth operation pattern based on the operation control execution data set in the process data.

Next, the outline of the flow of SP reach performance B and the outline of each performance part will be explained based on FIG. 11-13(B) and FIG. 11-15.

In N2-0, when the super reach variation pattern of SP reach β is determined as the variation pattern based on the occurrence of a starting prize, variable display of decorative symbols is started in each ornamental symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, although not shown in detail, after a preview performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot, a performance suggesting the start of the destruction of a fortress, etc. are executed, the variable display mode becomes a reach display mode.

In SP2-1, after a blackout effect in which the display area 5E is displayed as a black screen, ally A-4 calls on his allies (allies A-1 to A-3) to gather; A-1 to A-4 gather. Next, in SP2-3, the reach title name (type) of the SP reach effect is announced, and in SP2-4, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the effect (execution of fortress destruction) by the falling movable body 32 is announced. is executed.

In SP2-5, the name of the operation to destroy the fortress (for example, attack operation A) is announced, and in SP2-6 and SP2-7, allies A1-1 to 1-3 fight together to attack the fortress. , SP2-8, ally A1-4 attacks the fortress. Next, in SP2-9, if execution of the cut-in effect is determined in step 038SGS278, the cut-in effect of the determined type is executed. If execution is not determined, only the background image will be displayed.

At SP2-10, an operation promotion display that promotes operation of the chance button 631B is started. The timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected during the period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, that is, the operation validity period of the chance button 631B, or the operation validity period ends without any operation of the chance button 631B being detected. A determined performance is executed at the right time. In the deciding performance, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed; if the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 moves to the performance position. 32 does not move from the origin position to the presentation position, and an image with cracked glass is displayed.

In SP2-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the image of allies A-1 to A-4 successfully destroying the fortress is displayed, a jackpot confirmation symbol is displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation. If the variable display result is a failure, a failure confirmation symbol will be displayed along with an image of cracked glass indicating that allies A-1 to A-4 have failed to destroy the fortress, and a failure confirmation will be announced. be exposed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the extension command in the performance parts N2-0, SP2-1, SP2-4, and SP2-5, so that the rotation part 038SG401A of the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D ~038SG401D is not operated. Furthermore, when the extension command D033 is received in the production part SP2-2, operation control is executed to operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in a second operation pattern that operates in accordance with the switching display of character images. However, in the production part SP2-3, by not receiving the extended command, the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the fourth operation pattern based on the operation control execution data set in the process data. Execute control.

Further, when the extended command D036 is received in the production parts SP2-6 to SP2-8, the first part operates the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the production BGM such as music. When the motion control to operate according to the motion pattern is executed and the extended command D008 is received in the production part SP2-10, the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in accordance with the falling motion of the movable body 32. By executing motion control to operate in 3 motion patterns and not receiving an extended command in production part SP2-11, the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are controlled by the motion control execution data set in the process data. The operation control is executed to operate according to the fourth operation pattern based on the following.

Although not shown in FIGS. 11-14 and 11-15, for example, in the upper left of the display area 5E of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "2", etc.) 2. A display area is provided for displaying the number of pending memories (for example, the number "0", etc.) and a small design (for example, an arrow "↓↓↓") corresponding to the decorative design, and is synchronized with the variable display of the decorative design. The small symbols may be displayed variably. In addition, in the lower part of the display area 5E of the image display device 5, there is a first reservation memory display area where the number of first special symbols reserved can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory display area where the number of reserved special symbols can be displayed in a circular shape. A pending display area may be provided that includes a second pending memory display area that can be displayed depending on the number of pending displays, and an active display area for displaying pending displays corresponding to the variable display being executed as active displays. .

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned first pending memory number, second pending memory number, pending display, small symbol, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ally characters A-1 to A- 4, enemy characters X-1, While this prevents the visibility of the error display from decreasing, by displaying the decorative designs further back (in a lower layer) than the production images, the decoration patterns overlap and reduce the visibility of the production images. It may also be possible to prevent this from happening.

(Example of super reach performance B)
Next, a detailed performance operation example of SP reach performance B will be explained based on FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. FIG. 11-16 is an example of performance operation showing the flow of SP reach performance B from performance parts N2-0 to SP2-4. FIG. 11-17 is an example of performance operation showing the flow of SP reach performance B from performance parts N2-5 to SP2-8. FIG. 11-18 is an example of performance operation showing the flow of SP reach performance B from performance parts N2-9 to SP2-11.

In addition, in the following, the frame number written in the upper left of each frame (production screen) in Figures 11-16 to 11-18 (for example, SP2 in the upper left of each frame (production screen) corresponding to production part SP2-1) -1A, SP2-1B, SP2-1C, etc.).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in the performance part N2-0 of SP reach performance B, when the super reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach β is determined as the fluctuation pattern based on the occurrence of a starting prize, each decorative symbol Variable display of decorative patterns is started in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (N2-0A). Thereafter, although not shown in detail, after a preview performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot, a performance suggesting the start of the destruction of a fortress, etc. are executed, the variable display mode changes to the reach display mode (N2-0B).

In SP2-1, after a blackout effect is performed in which the display area 5E becomes a black screen (SP2-1A), an image A-4Z of ally A-4 appears after a predetermined time has elapsed (SP2-1A). 1B), the text image 038SG501 and voice saying "Lend me everyone's strength!" are output, calling for allies (allies A-1 to A-3) to gather (SP2-1C). In SP2-2, after the background image 038SG502 is displayed (SP2-2A), first, the image A-4Z of ally A-4 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, and the image is enlarged. Accordingly, the rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D rotates to the left (SP2-2B, SP2-2C).

Next, after the display of the image A-4Z is finished while the rotation of the rotating unit 038SG401D continues, the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, In accordance with the enlarged display, the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is rotated to the right (SP2-2D, SP2-2E).

Furthermore, after the display of image A-3Z is finished while the rotation of rotating parts 038SG401D and 038SG401C continues, image A-2Z of ally A-2 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen. At the same time, the rotating section 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B rotates to the left in accordance with the enlarged display (SP2-2F, SP2-2G).

In addition, after the display of image A-1Z is finished while the rotation of rotating parts 038SG401D, 038SG401C, and 038SG401B continues, image A-1Z of ally A-1 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen. At the same time, the rotating section 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A rotates clockwise in accordance with the enlarged display (SP2-2H, SP2-2I). As a result, allies A-1 to A-4 were gathered together.

In SP2-3, the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed one character at a time from the back of the screen to the front, and finally the reach of the SP reach effect becomes "SP reach effect B!" After the title name (type) is configured and displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state when the first character image 038SG503 of "S" is displayed (SP2-3A), a predetermined The opening and closing operations (opening and closing operations) are repeated at intervals, and in accordance with the opening and closing operations (opening and closing operations), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate and stop at the same time ( SP2-3A to SP2-3F).

In addition, the third closed state (SP2-3E) of wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is maintained for a longer time than the first and second closed states (SP2-3A, SP2-3C), and the third open state (SP2-3E) is maintained for a longer time than the first and second closed states (SP2-3A, SP2-3C). -3F) is maintained for a longer time than the first and second open states (SP2-3B, SP2-3D), indicating that the character image 038SG503 "SP reach effect B!" is displayed. It can be made to look good by opening and closing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321.

In SP2-4, after the variable display mode changes to the reach display mode (SP2-4A), the movable body 32 falls and the effect image 038SG504 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, thereby developing the production ( A development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the destruction of the fortress is executed (SP2-4B).

As shown in Figure 11-17, in SP2-5, after the development suggestion performance ends, the background becomes dark (SP2-5A), the background becomes a little brighter, and the image A-4Z and "You're not alone" appear. After the character image 038SG505 "..." is displayed (SP2-5B), the character image 038SG505 is enlarged and displayed (SP2-5C). Then, the text image 038SG505 is switched from "I'm not alone..." to "I'll show you everyone's power!" and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state (SP2 -5D), the image 038SG506 "Attack Operation A" indicating the name of the fortress destruction operation is displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state (SP2-5E).

In SP2-6, first, an image A-1Z of ally A-1 attacking a fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are displayed. ~038SG401D rotates and stops all at once (SP2-6A). Next, an image A-2Z of ally A-2 attacking the fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D simultaneously move. Rotate and stop (SP2-6B). Next, an image A-3Z of ally A-3 attacking a fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D move all at once. Rotate and stop (SP2-6C).

In addition, an image A-1Z of ally A-1 attacking a fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D simultaneously move. Rotate and stop (SP2-6D). Next, the image A-2Z of ally A-2 attacking the fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D move all at once. Rotate and stop (SP2-6E). Next, an image A-3Z of ally A-3 attacking a fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D move all at once. Rotate and stop (SP2-6F).

In SP2-7, the images A-1Z, A-2Z, and A-3Z of each of the gathered allies A-1, A-2, and A-3 are enlarged and displayed step by step, and at the timing of switching the enlarged display. At the same time, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate by a predetermined angle (for example, about 10 degrees) (SP2-7A to SP2-7C).

In SP2-8, an image A-4Z of ally A-4 attacking a fortress is displayed, and while wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from an open state to a closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are displayed. rotate and stop all at once (SP2-8A). Next, the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 attacking the fortress is displayed enlarged, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D simultaneously move while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state. Rotates and stops (SP2-8B).

Then, the image 038SG507 of the fortress being attacked is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate and stop all at once ( SP2-8C), image A-4Z of ally A-4 attacking the fortress is displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are displayed. rotate and stop all at once (SP2-8D). Then, the same operations as SP2-8C and SP2-8D are repeated once again (SP2-8E, SP2-8F).

Next, images A-1Z, A-2Z, A-3Z, and A-4Z of the gathered allies A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4 are displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened. After the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D stop (SP2-8G) while maintaining the same state, the image A-4Z of ally A-4 making the final attack is displayed, and the wing 038SG221 , 038SG321 are maintained in the open state, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate at low speed (SP2-8H).

In SP2-9, if execution of the cut-in effect pattern CP-4 is determined in step 038SGS278, the cut-in image 038SG601 of ally A-1 is displayed, and the character panel 038SG400A corresponding to ally A-1 is displayed. The rotating part 038SG401A rotates (SP2-9A). Next, after the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG602 of ally A-2 is displayed on the display layer above the cut-in image 038SG601, and the character corresponding to ally A-2 is displayed. The rotating part 038SG401B of the panel 038SG400B rotates (SP2-9B). Next, after the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG603 of ally A-3 is displayed on the display layer above the cut-in images 038SG601 and 038SG602, and the cut-in image 038SG603 corresponding to ally A-3 is displayed. The rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C rotates (SP2-9C). Next, after the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG604 of the ally A-4 is displayed on the upper display layer of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603, and the cut-in image 038SG604 corresponding to the ally A-4 is displayed. The rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D rotates (SP2-9D).

Then, the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D is stopped, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG322 change from the open state to the closed state, and the cut-in image 038SG605 in which ally A-4 attacks with a punch is displayed ( SP2-9E), the wings 038SG221 and 038SG322 change from the closed state to the open state, and an image 038SG606 of ally A-4 making the final blow is displayed (SP2-9F).

At SP2-10, an operation promotion image 038SG650 that promotes operation of the chance button 631B is displayed (SP2-10A). The period during which the operation promotion image 038SG650 is displayed, that is, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation valid period ends without any operation of the chance button 631B being detected. The determined performance will be executed at the specified timing.

In the deciding performance, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation validity period of the chance button 631B, or the operation validity period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B. At this timing, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, the effect image 038SG651 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate (SP2-10B ). After that, the movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D stop rotating, and the image 038SG652 of the fortress about to be destroyed is displayed (SP2-10C ).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B. Then, the movable body 32 does not move from the origin position to the production position, and the rotation of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D remains stopped, and the image 038SG653 of the glass being cracked is displayed (SP2-10D).

In SP2-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the image 038SG654 indicating that allies A-1 to A-4 have successfully destroyed the fortress is displayed (SP2-11A), and then the jackpot confirmed symbol is displayed. As a result, a jackpot confirmation notification is performed (SP2-11B). On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the image 038SG653 of cracked glass indicating that allies A-1 to A-4 have failed to destroy the fortress will remain displayed, and the failure confirmation symbol will be displayed. A failure confirmation notification is performed (SP2-11C).

(Example of production operation control in production part)
Next, an example of performance operation control of some performance parts in SP reach performance B will be described based on FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21. In FIGS. 11-19, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-2, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-3. In FIGS. 11-20, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-6, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-7. In FIGS. 11-21, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production operation control of the production part SP2-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of production operation control of the production part SP2-10.

As mentioned above, the production control CPU 120 processes the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation control (execution data, etc.) to control production devices such as the image display device 5. Therefore, when performing reach effects such as N reach effects and SP reach effects A and B, control is performed to display various images on the image display device 5 based on display control execution data of process data, and ramp control execution of process data is performed. Based on the data, various lamps such as the character panel LED038SG404A to 038SG404D are controlled to turn on/off, and based on the sound control execution data of the process data, the speakers 8L and 8R produce sounds (for example, voices, BGM of songs, etc.). ), and controls to operate the movable body 32, wings 038SG221, 038SG321, rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D, etc. based on the motion control execution data.

In addition, in the feature section 038SG, when the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command from the display control section 123, it controls turning on/off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and operates the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating sections 038SG401A to 038SG401D. The control is performed based on lamp control data and operation control data that are different from the lamp control execution data and operation control execution data of the process data, and are prepared according to the type of extended command. .

In the characteristic section 038SG, illustration of lamp control data corresponding to extension command BXXX is omitted, and for operation control data corresponding to extension commands D033, D036, and D008, see FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26. This will be explained later.

First, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-2 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-19(A), the production control CPU 120 displays the background image 038SG502 on the image display device 5 in SP2-2A of the production part SP2-2 based on the display control execution data of the process data. A command for causing the display to be displayed is output to the display control unit 123. Along with this, the display control unit 123 generates the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as a background image 038SG502 (image data) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and When performing display processing to output image 038SG502 (image data) as a video signal, that is, when displaying background image 038SG502 on image display device 5 in SP2-2A, extended command D033 and extended command BXXX are generated. It is transmitted to the production control CPU 120.

The production control CPU 120 that received the extended command D033 controls the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D to the At the same time, control is performed to turn on/off the character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D in a predetermined lighting pattern based on lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX. Start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-19(A), in SP2-2A to SP2-2I of the production part SP2-2, the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device based on the display control execution data of the process data. The background image 038SG502, image A-4Z, image A-3Z, image A-2Z, and image A-1Z are displayed in order on Continuously output BGM.

Also, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, from the state where character panel LED038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned off, character panel LED038SG404D, character panel LED038SG404C, character panel LED038SG404B, and character panel LED038SG404A are turned on in this order. To go.

Also, based on the motion control data for the wing corresponding to the expansion command D033 (see Figure 11-22), while maintaining the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 in the open state, the motion control for the character panel corresponding to the expansion command D033 is performed. Based on the data (see FIG. 11-23), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated in the order of rotating part 038SG401D, rotating part 038SG401C, rotating part 038SG401B, and rotating part 038SG401A.

In this way, in SP2-2A to SP2-2I of the production part SP2-2, the production control CPU 120 displays the images A-4Z to A-1Z on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display of each image A-4Z to A-1Z. Lamp control that sequentially turns on character panel LED038SG404A to 038SG404D corresponding to each image A-4Z to A-1Z, and rotation unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to each displayed image A-4Z to A-1Z in sequence. The operation control of the second operation pattern is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 displays the enlarged images A-1Z to A-4Z so as to correspond to the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of each image A-1Z to A-4Z. It is possible to perform operation control based on a second operation pattern in which the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to 4Z are individually rotated.

As described above, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for displaying on the image display device 5 to the display control section 123, and the image to be displayed on the display control section 123 is output to the display control section 123. By performing display processing to generate and display on the image display device 5, for example, when displaying a high-quality image with a large amount of data, the production control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 and then actually displays it. Since there may be a time lag before the image is displayed, when the production control CPU 120 rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the image display, there may be a slight lag between the image display and the start timing of the operation. There is a possibility that it will happen. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 starts operation control based on the extended command output when the display control unit 123 performs display processing to display an image on the image display device 5, thereby adjusting the performance in accordance with the display of the image. It becomes possible to start the rotation of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D at a suitable timing.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-3 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-19(B), in SP2-3A to SP2-3F of the production part SP2-3, the production control CPU 120 displays characters on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. The image 038SG503 is gradually enlarged and displayed, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data.

In addition, since the extended command as lamp control information has not been received, based on the lamp control execution data of the process data, after turning off the character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D from SP2-3A to SP2-3E, SP2-3F Turn on character panel LED038SG404A to 038SG404D.

In addition, since the extension command as the movable body control information has not been received, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are changed at regular intervals between the closed state and the open state based on the motion control execution data of the process data. Rotating and stopping operations of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are repeated in accordance with the opening and closing operations of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321.

In this way, in SP2-3A to SP2-3F of the production part SP2-3, the production control CPU 120 uses the operation control execution data of the process data, regardless of displaying images on the image display device 5 or outputting sounds. Operation control based on the fourth operation pattern can be executed based on the fourth operation pattern.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-6 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-20(A), in SP2-6A of the production part SP2-6, the display control unit 123 displays the extended command D036 and the extended command when displaying the image A-1Z on the image display device 5. BXXX is generated and transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In SP2-6A to SP2-6F of the production part SP2-6, the production control CPU 120 displays images A-1Z, A-2Z, and A- on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. 3Z are displayed in order, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In addition, in the production part SP2-6, low-volume sound effects (low) and high-volume sound effects (large) such as "Don" and "Jang" are repeated in a certain rhythm over the BGM. It is now output.

Also, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are made to blink in synchronization with the timing at which sound effects (small) are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the speaker 8L , 8R repeats the control to turn on the light in accordance with the timing when the sound effect (large) is output.

Also, based on the wing operation control data (see Figure 11-22) corresponding to the extended command D036, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are closed in accordance with the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, control is repeated to change the open state to the open state in synchronization with the timing at which the loud sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, based on the motion control data for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D036 (see Figure 11-23), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are adjusted to the timing at which the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The control is repeated to rotate and stop at the timing when the loud sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in SP2-6A to SP2-6F of the production part SP2-6, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamps to blink and light up the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and controls the sound effects (small) and the like from the speakers 8L and 8R. In accordance with the rhythm (timing) at which a beat such as a sound effect (loud) is output, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated and stopped. . In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs operation control based on a first operation pattern in which the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated to correspond to the rhythm of the performance sound. , 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can be executed.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-7 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-20(B), in SP2-7A to SP2-7C of the production part SP2-7, the production control CPU 120 displays an image on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. A-1Z, image A-2Z, and image A-3Z are gradually enlarged and displayed, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In the performance part SP2-7, a loud sound effect is repeatedly output with a constant rhythm over BGM.

Also, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on and then turned off in synchronization with the timing at which sound effects (large) are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Repeat control.

Also, based on the motion control data for the wing corresponding to the expansion command D036 (see Figure 11-22), while maintaining the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 in the open state, the motion control for the character panel corresponding to the expansion command D036 is performed. Based on the data (see FIGS. 11-23), control is repeated to rotate and then stop the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in synchronization with the timing at which the loud sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in SP2-7A to SP2-7C of the production part SP2-7, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamps to turn on and off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and controls the sound effects (loud) from the speakers 8L and 8R. In accordance with the rhythm (timing) at which the beat is output, while keeping the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 in the open state, only the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated and then stopped, and the first operation pattern is controlled. . In other words, the production control CPU 120 performs operation control based on a first operation pattern in which the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated to correspond to the rhythm of the production sound (the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotation part are operated to correspond to the rhythm of the production sound). 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated in conjunction with each other).

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-8 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), in SP2-8A of the production part SP2-8, the display control unit 123 displays the extended command D036 and the extended command when displaying the image A-1Z on the image display device 5. BXXX is generated and transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In SP2-8A to SP2-8G of the production part SP2-8, the production control CPU 120 displays an image A-4Z of an ally A-4 attacking a fortress on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. In addition to displaying an image 038SG507 of a fortress being attacked, etc., BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In addition, in the production part SP2-8, low-volume sound effects (low) and high-volume sound effects (large) such as "Don" and "Jang" are repeated in a certain rhythm over the BGM. It is now output.

Also, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are made to blink in synchronization with the timing at which sound effects (small) are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the speaker 8L , 8R repeats the control to turn on the light in accordance with the timing when the sound effect (large) is output.

Also, based on the wing operation control data (see Figure 11-24) corresponding to the extended command D036, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are closed in accordance with the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, control is repeated to change the open state to the open state in synchronization with the timing at which the loud sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, based on the motion control data for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D036 (see Figure 11-25), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are adjusted to the timing at which the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The control is repeated to rotate and stop at the timing when the loud sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, from SP2-8F to SP2-8H, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state, and at SP2-8H, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated at low speed for a predetermined time and then stopped.

In this way, in SP2-8A to SP2-8G of the production part SP2-8, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamps to blink and light up the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and controls the sound effects (small) and the like from the speakers 8L and 8R. In accordance with the rhythm (timing) at which a beat such as a sound effect (loud) is output, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated and stopped. . In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs operation control based on a first operation pattern in which the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated to correspond to the rhythm of the performance sound. , 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can be executed.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-10 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(B), in SP2-10A of the production part SP2-10, the production control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion image 038SG650 on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. At the same time, while keeping wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 open, character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are lit.

Then, at the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B, the production control CPU 120 is activated. The body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the production position, and an effect image 038SG651 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. Here, when displaying the effect image 038SG651 on the image display device 5, the display control unit 123 generates an extension command D008 and an extension command BXXX and sends them to the production control CPU 120.

Therefore, in SP2-10B of the performance part SP2-10, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to blink the character panels LED038SG404A to 038SG404D based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX.

Also, based on the motion control data for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D008 (see FIG. 11-26), control is performed to rotate the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D for a predetermined time and then stop them. Thereafter, the movable body 32 is raised and returned to the original position.

In this way, in SP2-10A to SP2-10C of the production part SP2-10, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance according to the fall of the movable body 32, regardless of the display of images on the image display device 5 or the output of sound. Operation control based on the third operation pattern can be executed.

(operation control data)
Next, the operation control data of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command will be explained based on FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26. FIGS. 11-22 are explanatory diagrams in which (A) shows the wing operation control data based on the extended command D033, and (B) and (C) show the contents of the control data in (A). FIGS. 11-23 are explanatory diagrams in which (A) shows character panel motion control data based on the extended command D033, and (B), (C), and (D) show the contents of the control data in (A). FIG. 11-24 is a diagram showing wing operation control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-25 is a diagram showing character panel motion control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-26 is a diagram showing character panel motion control data based on the extended command D008.

As shown in FIG. 11-22(A), the operation control data of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extension command D033 is the final control that controls the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 as movable bodies so as not to operate them. It is made up of a plurality of control data tables each including a plurality of control data arranged in chronological order. The plurality of control data tables are grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B (lower control data tables) and control data tables (intermediate control data tables) higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B, and are A child control data table 038SG802 in which a control period in which the data table is used and a storage address of the grandchild control data table are defined, and a control data table higher than the child control data table 038SG802, which includes the child control data table. The control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B includes a parent control data table 038SG803 (upper control data table) in which the control period in which the table is used and the storage address of the child control data table are defined. A control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one-step operation, and an upper limit of operation are determined.

Specifically, the parent control data table 038SG803 (const struct S_MOTO_A []).

In the child control data table 038SG802 (const struct S_MOTO_J &XD___LSDHD_D033_1, 1800, &XD___LSDHD_D033_2, etc.).

Grandchild control data table 038SG801A (const struct S_MOTO 1, This is control data for changing the 038SG321 to an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11-22(B), for example, in the control data "{ 10*10,10, MOT_R_Z }," "10" on the left side is the step for operating the motors (drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302). The second and third numbers "10" indicate the time required to make one step. "MOT" indicates the motor (drive motor 038SG202, 038SG302), "R" indicates clockwise rotation, and "Z" indicates that the upper limit is the sensor. In other words, the control data "{ 10*10,10, MOT_R_Z }," is control data for executing operation control that rotates the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 clockwise for 100 ms and stops the operation when detected by the sensor.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22(C), for example, the control data "{ 10*10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT}," indicates that "10" on the left side operates the motors (drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302). The second and third numbers "10" indicate the time required to perform one step. "MOT" is the motor (drive motor 038SG202, 038SG302), "SDHD" is the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 (see Figure 11-32 (A)), and "DERU_LIMIT" is the number of steps specified in the software (=247 steps). Indicates that the amount will be sent to the upper limit. In other words, the control data "{ 10*10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT}," rotates the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 for 100ms, and stops the operation after rotating to the number of steps (=247 steps) determined on the software. This is control data for executing operation control.

Then, the operation control based on the control data of the multiple grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B set in the child control data table 038SG802 (const struct S_MOTO_J Operations corresponding to SP2-3A to SP2-3F are executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 038SG, a mode has been illustrated in which the operation of the left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is controlled by the control data shown in FIG. 11-22(A), but the present invention is not limited to this. Control data corresponding to each of the left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), the operation control data of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D033 is the drive motor 038SG402A of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body. It consists of parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D, which are composed of a plurality of control data arranged in chronological order, including the final control data that controls the 038SG813A to 038SG813D not to operate. , a control period in which the control data is used, and a rotation direction are determined.

The parent control data table 038SG813A (const struct S_MOTO_A SG400B The parent control data table 038SG813C (const struct S_MOTO_A 038SG813D (const struct S_MOTO_A

As shown in Figure 11-23 (B), for example, in the control data "2800, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]", "2800" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is The rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, "STOP" indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is stopped by full-layer excitation. In other words, the control data "2800, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]" is control data for executing operation control to stop the drive motor 038SG402A for 2800 ms.

As shown in Figure 11-23(C), for example, in the control data of "10970, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW[0]", "10970" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is The rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, "CW" indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is rotated to the right (clockwise). In other words, the control data "10970, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW[0]" is control data for executing operation control to rotate the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise for 10970 ms.

As shown in Figure 11-23 (D), for example, in the control data of "13700, &XD_J_LSHKU_CCW[0]", "13700" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is The rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, "CCW" indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is rotated to the left (counterclockwise). In other words, the control data "10970, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW[0]" is control data for executing operation control to rotate the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise for 10970 ms.

And parent control data tables 038SG813A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D033[]), 038SG813B (const struct S_MOTO_A 813D (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKS_D033[]) is set for each By executing the operation control based on the plurality of control data included in the performance part SP2-2, the operations corresponding to SP2-2B of the performance part SP2-2 to SP2-4A of the performance part SP2-4 are executed.

In addition, each parent control data table 038SG813A, 038SG813B, 038SG813C, and 038SG813D has control data set to rotate the rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, so that each rotating part 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be rotated. It is now possible to do so. In other words, since the operation of each of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled using one common control data, the data capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-24, the operation control data of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D036 is used as the final control to control the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 as movable bodies so as not to operate them. It is made up of a plurality of control data tables each including a plurality of control data arranged in chronological order. The plurality of control data tables are grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D (lower control data tables) and control data tables higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D, and the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are used. Child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (intermediate control data table) in which the control period to be performed and the storage address of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are defined, and controls higher than the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C. A parent control data table 038SG823 (upper control data table) which is a data table and defines the control period in which the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C are used and the storage address of the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C; , and the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D has a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one step operation, and an upper limit of operation.

Specifically, in the parent control data table 038SG823 (const struct S_MOTO_A &XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1[0], 8190, &XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2[0], 600000, &XD_J_LSDHD_D036_3[0]).

Child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1[], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2[], const struct S_MOTO_J Control period in which 1A to 038SG821D are used and the corresponding grandchild control data table (1280, &XD___LSDHD_D036_1[0], 1280, &XD___LSDHD_D036_2[0], 3556, &XD___LSDHD_D036_4[0], etc.).

The grandchild control data table 038SG821A (const struct S_MOTO , The grandchild control data table 038SG821C (const struct S_MOTO 038SG821D (const struct S_MOTO

Note that the control data in the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are similar to the control data explained with reference to FIG. 11-22, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Then, multiple grandchild control data tables 03 set in child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1[], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2[], const struct S_MOTO_J Based on control data of 8SG821A to 038SG821D By executing the operation control, the operations corresponding to the performance parts SP2-5 to SP2-8 are executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25, the operation control data of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D036 is used to control the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D as movable bodies. It is made up of a plurality of control data tables that are made up of a plurality of control data arranged in chronological order, including the final control data that controls not to operate. The plurality of control data tables are grandchild control data tables 038SG831 and 038SG841 (lower control data tables) and control data tables higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG831 and 038SG841, and are control periods in which the grandchild control data tables are used. child control data tables 038SG832, 038SG842 (intermediate control data tables) in which the storage address of the grandchild control data table is defined, and a control data table higher than the child control data tables 038SG832, 038SG842, Parent control data tables 038SG833 and 038SG843 (superordinate control data tables) in which the control period in which the child control data table is used and the storage address of the child control data table are defined, and the grandchild control data table 038SG831, In the control data of 038SG841, the control period and rotation direction in which the control data is used are determined.

The parent control data table 038SG833 (const struct S_MOTO_A The storage address of the child control data table is determined (600000, &XD_J_LSHKU_D036[0]). On the other hand, the parent control data table 038SG843 (const struct S_MOTO_A and the storage address of the child control data table are defined (600000, &XD_J_LSMKU_D036[0]).

Note that the plurality of control data described in the parent control data tables 038SG833 and 038SG843 are the same as the control data described with reference to FIG. 11-23, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the child control data table 038SG832 (const struct S_MOTO_J . On the other hand, the child control data table 038SG842 (const struct S_MOTO_J ]).

Then, operation control based on a plurality of control data set in each of parent control data table 038SG833 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D036[]) and parent control data table 038SG843 (const struct S_MOTO_A (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSHKU_D036[]) and child control data table 038SG842 (const struct S_MOTO_J The operation corresponding to -8 is executed.

Also, by setting the control data for rotating the rotation part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A in the parent control data table 038SG833, the rotation part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C will also rotate together. There is. In addition, by setting the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B in the parent control data table 038SG843, the rotating part 038SG401D of the lower right character panel 038SG400D will also rotate together. ing. In other words, the upper left and lower left rotating parts can be controlled using one common control data, and the upper right and lower right rotating parts can be controlled using one common control data. , data capacity can be reduced.

Furthermore, by setting the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401A (LSHKU) of the upper left character panel 038SG400A as the control data of the parent control data table 038SG843, the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B rotates. Therefore, the operation of the four rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled using common control data, and the data capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26, the operation control data of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D008 is used to control the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D as movable bodies. Consists of parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D, which are composed of a plurality of control data arranged in chronological order, including final control data that controls not to operate, and the control data of parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D is A control period in which the data is used and a direction of rotation are determined.

Parent control data table 038SG853A (const struct S_MOTO_A SG400B The parent control data table 038SG853C (const struct S_MOTO_A 038SG853D (const struct S_MOTO_A

Note that the control data in the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D are similar to the control data described with reference to FIG. 11-23, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

And parent control data tables 038SG853A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D008[]), 038SG853B (const struct S_MOTO_A 853D (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKS_D008[]) is set for each By executing the operation control based on the plurality of control data, the operations corresponding to SP2-10B to SP2-10C of the performance part SP2-10 are executed.

In addition, each parent control data table 038SG853A to 038SG853D has control data set for rotating the rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, so that each rotating part 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be rotated. It has become. In other words, since the operation of each of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled using one common control data, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Example of wing and character panel movement control based on extended commands)
Next, an example of the operation control of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the performance control CPU 120 based on reception of the extended command will be described based on FIGS. 11-27 to 11-32. FIG. 11-27 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the wing operation control data based on the extended command D033. FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the character panel motion control data based on the extended command D033. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the wing operation control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the character panel motion control data based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-31 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the character panel motion control data based on the extended command D008. In Figures 11-32, (A) is a diagram showing the wing and character panel described in the control data, (B) is a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used to control the movement of the wing, and (C) ) is a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used to control the movement of the character panel.

The production control CPU 120 regularly executes timer interrupt processing, and when receiving an extended command for controlling a movable body from the display control unit 123, it responds to the received extended command at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 ms). control data tables (for example, the parent control data table (upper control data table) shown in Figures 11-22 to 11-26, the child control data table (middle level control data table), the grandchild control data table (lower level control data table), etc. The operation control of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is executed based on the control data described in the table)).

In addition, for control data different from the final control data in each control data table, the production control CPU 120 uses a control timer (for example, a parent timer counter (parent TC) described later) that can time the control period in which each control data is used. , child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandchild TC), etc.) are timed up and changed to the next control data, thereby ending the control using each control data. If a specific condition, which will be described later, is satisfied before a control timer capable of measuring the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up, the control is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the operation control process described above, the parent timer counter (parent TC), child timer counter (child TC), and grandchild timer counter (grandchild TC) are subtracted and updated every predetermined time (for example, 1 ms).

In addition, if the storage destination address of the lower-level child control data table or grandchild control data table is written in the top-level parent control data table, the control time using the child control data table or grandchild control data table is , move to the child control data table and grandchild control data table, execute control based on the control data written in the child control data table and grandchild control data table, and when the parent timer counter times out, the next control data Shift to control based on In addition, if the storage address of the lower-level grandchild control data table is written in the child control data table, the control time using the grandchild control data table is set in the child timer counter, and the control time is transferred to the grandchild control data table. Control is executed based on the control data written in the control data table, and when the child timer counter times out, control is shifted to control based on the next control data.

(Example of wing operation control based on extended command D033)
Next, an example of the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 performed by the production control CPU 120 based on receiving the extended command D033 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-27, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command D033, it reads the parent control data table 038SG803 shown in FIG. 11-22, and sets the parent timer counter (parent TC) to a predetermined value (for example, 6000000ms, 100 minutes). Next, with reference to the child control data table 038SG802, the control time (for example, 4700 ms) of the first described control data is set in the child timer counter (child TC), and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off ( (de-energized state).

Next, when the child timer counter times up (child TC = 0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter does not time up (parent TC > 0), the data is written next to child control data table 038SG802. Shift to control of the control data that is currently being used. Specifically, the process moves to the grandchild control data table 038SG801A and sets the control time (for example, 1800 ms) in the child timer counter. Next, based on the first control data (10*10,10, MOT_R_Z) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A, the control time (for example, 10×10=100ms) is set in the grandchild timer counter A (grandchild TCA). Set the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 to the right by 10 steps in 100 ms.

Next, when grandchild timer counter A has timed up (grandchild TCA=0), check the child timer counter, and if the child timer counter has not timed up (child TC>0), control data written next ( 10*8, 8, MOT_R_Z), set the control time (for example, 10×8=80ms) in the grandchild timer counter A, and rotate the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 clockwise by 10 steps in 80ms. From then on, when grandchild timer counter A times up (grandchild TC = 0), check the child timer counter, and if the child timer counter does not time up (child TC > 0), the control data written next The process of executing the control based on this is repeated.

Then, when the grandchild timer counter A of the final control data times up (grandchild TCA=0), if the child timer counter does not time up (child TC>0), the child timer counter A is written in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A. This results in a transition to a loop state in which control is repeatedly performed based on a plurality of pieces of control data.

However, the control time for the previous control data (600000, 6, MOT_R_Z) and the last control data (600000, 3, MOT_R_Z) is longer than other control data (for example, 600000ms). Therefore, after starting the previous control data (600000, 6, MOT_R_Z) or the last control data (600000, 3, MOT_R_Z), the child timer The counter will time out. Therefore, when the child timer counter has timed up (grandchild TCA>0, child TC=0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter has not timed up (parent TC>0), the production control CPU 120 Assuming that a specific condition is met, the next item in the child control data table 038SG802 is displayed according to the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched from SP2-3A to SP2-3B). Shift to (change) the control data described in .

Specifically, the process moves to the grandchild control data table 038SG801B and sets the control time (for example, 1800 ms) in the child timer counter. Next, based on the first control data (10*10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801B, the control time (for example, 10×10=100ms) is set in the grandchild timer counter B (grandchild TCB). Set the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 to the left by 10 steps in 100 ms.

Next, when grandchild timer counter B has timed up (grandchild TCB=0), check the child timer counter, and if the child timer counter has not timed up (child TC>0), the control data described next ( 10*8, 8, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT), set a control time (for example, 10×8=80ms) in the grandchild timer counter B, and rotate the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 to the left by 10 steps in 80ms. From then on, when grandchild timer counter B times up (grandchild TC = 0), check the child timer counter, and if the child timer counter does not time up (child TC > 0), the control data written next The process of executing the control based on this is repeated.

Then, when grandchild timer counter B of the final control data has timed up (grandchild TCB=0), if the child timer counter has not timed up (child TC>0), it is written in grandchild control data table 038SG801B. This results in a transition to a loop state in which the process of repeatedly executing control based on the control data is performed.

However, since the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) is set to a longer control time (for example, 600000ms) than other control data, the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) After starting control, the child timer counter will time up before grandchild timer counter B times up. If the child timer counter has timed up (grandchild TCB>0, child TC=0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter has not timed up (parent TC>0), the performance control CPU 120, Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, control is shifted to control based on the control data written next in the child control data table 038SG802.

From then on, after repeatedly executing the above process, the final control data written in the child control data table 038SG802, that is, the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) written in the grandchild control data table 038SG801B. After starting control based on the process, and before grandchild timer counter B, child timer counter, and parent timer counter time up (grandchild TCB > 0, child TC > 0, parent TC > 0), other operation commands (for example, process When receiving an operation command based on the data or an operation command based on other extended commands, the production control CPU 120 concludes that the specific condition is satisfied and ends the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D033, Shifts to operation control based on other operation commands.

(Example of character panel operation control based on extended command D033)
Next, an example of the operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the performance control CPU 120 based on reception of the extended command D033 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-28, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command D033, it reads out the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D shown in FIG. 11-23, and writes information in each of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D. Start controlling the control data that is currently being controlled.

First, in the parent control data table 038SG813A, a predetermined value (for example, 2800 ms) is set in the parent timer counter A (parent TCA) based on the control data (2800, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]) described first, and the drive is started. The motor 038SG402A is brought to a stopped state by excitation of all layers. Next, when parent timer counter A times out (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 10970ms) is set to parent timer counter A based on the control data (10970, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]) described next. set, and rotate the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise. Next, when parent timer counter A times out (parent TCA=0), parent timer counter A is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100 minute) and bring the drive motor 038SG402A to a stopped state by excitation of all layers.

In addition, in the parent control data table 038SG813B, based on the control data (2100, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]) described first, a predetermined value (for example, 2100 ms) is set in the parent timer counter B (parent TCB), and the drive is started. The motor 038SG402B is brought to a stopped state by excitation of all layers. Next, when parent timer counter B times out (parent TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 11670 ms) is set to parent timer counter B based on the control data (11670, &XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]) described next. set, and rotate the drive motor 038SG402B to the left. Next, when parent timer counter B times out (parent TCB = 0), parent timer counter B is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100 minute) and bring the drive motor 038SG402B to a stopped state by excitation of all layers.

In addition, in the parent control data table 038SG813C, a predetermined value (for example, 700 ms) is set in the parent timer counter C (parent TCC) based on the control data (700, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]) described first, and the drive The motor 038SG402C is brought to a stopped state by excitation of all layers. Next, when the parent timer counter C times out (parent TCC = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 10970ms) is set to the parent timer counter C based on the control data (13070, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]) described next. set, and rotate the drive motor 038SG402C clockwise. Next, when the parent timer counter C times out (parent TCC = 0), the parent timer counter C is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100 minute) and bring the drive motor 038SG402C to a stopped state by exciting all layers.

In addition, in the parent control data table 038SG813D, based on the control data (13700, &XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]) described first, a predetermined value (for example, 13700 ms) is set in the parent timer counter D, and the drive motor 038SG402D is turned to the left. Rotate. Next, when the parent timer counter D times out (parent TCD = 0), the parent timer counter D is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100 minute) and bring the drive motor 038SG402D to a stopped state by excitation of all layers.

As a result, the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D start rotating in the order of rotation parts 038SG401D, 038SG401C, 038SG401B, and 038SG401A in the production part SP2-2.

In addition, after starting control based on the final control data (6000000, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]) described in each of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D, other operation commands ( For example, when receiving an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command, the production control CPU 120 assumes that a specific condition is satisfied and controls the operation of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D033. , and move on to operation control based on other operation commands.

(Example of wing operation control based on extended command D036)
Next, an example of the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 performed by the production control CPU 120 based on receiving the extended command D036 will be described. Note that even when extended command D036 is received, the same control as when extended command D033 is received is basically executed, so the flow will be outlined below and detailed control details will be omitted. I decided to.

As shown in FIG. 11-29, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command D036, it reads the parent control data table 038SG823 shown in FIG. 11-24, and sets the parent timer counter (parent TC) to a predetermined value (for example, 11890ms, 100 minutes). Next, referring to the child control data table 038SG822A, the control time (for example, 6767 ms) is set in the child timer counter A (child TCA) based on the control data (6767, &XD___LMOTO_OFF [0]) written first. set, and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off (non-excited).

Next, when child timer counter A times up (child TCA=0), check the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter does not time up (parent TC>0), the timer is written in the child control data table 038SG822A. The control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821B and 038SG821D is executed in order.

Next, when the parent timer counter or child timer counter B times out (parent TCA = 0 or child TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 8190 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the data is written in the child control data table 038SG822B. The control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A and 038SG821B is repeatedly executed in order.

Next, when the parent timer counter or child timer counter A times out (parent TCA = 0 or child TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 1600 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off ( (de-energized state).

Next, when the parent timer counter times out (parent TCA=0), a predetermined value (for example, 600000ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A and 038SG821B described in the child control data table 038SG822C are controlled. Control based on data is executed repeatedly in sequence.

Based on the final control data (600000, &XD___LMOTO_OFF [0]) described in the child control data table 038SG822C or the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A. After starting control, if another operation command (for example, an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command) is received before the parent timer counter times up, the production control CPU 120 Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D036 is ended, and the operation control is shifted to operation control based on other operation commands.

(Example of character panel movement control based on extended command D036)
Next, an example of the operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the performance control CPU 120 based on reception of the extended command D036 will be described. Note that even when extended command D036 is received, the same control as when extended command D033 is received is basically executed. This will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-30, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command D036, it reads the parent control data table 038SG833 shown in FIG. 11-25 and sets the parent timer counter A (parent TCA) to a predetermined value (for example, .

Next, when the parent timer counter A times out (parent TCA=0), the drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C rotate clockwise by sequentially executing control based on the next control data described in the parent control data table 038SG833. The operation of stopping is repeated.

Next, when the parent timer counter A times out (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 600000 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the control data of the grandchild control data table 038SG841 written in the child control data table 038SG842A is The control based on is executed repeatedly in order.

On the other hand, when the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command D036, it reads the parent control data table 038SG843 shown in FIG. Based on the first described control data (12380, &XD_J_LMOTO_OFF [0]), the drive motors 038SG402B and 038SG402D are turned off (non-excited).

Next, when the parent timer counter B times out (parent TCB=0), the drive motors 038SG402B and 038SG402D rotate counterclockwise by sequentially executing control based on the next control data described in the parent control data table 038SG843. The operation of stopping is repeated.

Next, when the parent timer counter B times out (parent TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 600000 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the control data of the grandchild control data table 038SG841B written in the child control data table 038SG842B is The control based on is executed repeatedly in order.

Then, the final control data (600000, &XD___LSHKU_D036[0], 600000, &XD___LSMKU_D036[0]) described in the child control data tables 038SG832 and 038SG842 or the final control data described in the grandchild control data tables 038SG831 and 038SG841 After starting control based on control data (600000,10, MOT_OFF), before the parent timer counter times out, other operation commands (for example, operation commands based on process data or operation commands based on other extended commands) ), the performance control CPU 120 assumes that the specific condition is satisfied, ends the operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D036, and shifts to operation control based on other operation commands.

(Example of character panel movement control based on extended command D008)
Next, an example of the operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the performance control CPU 120 based on reception of the extended command D008 will be described. Note that even when extended command D008 is received, the same control as when extended commands D033 and D036 are received is basically executed. will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-31, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command D008, it reads the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D shown in FIG. ) is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2000ms), and based on the control data described first (2000, &XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0], &XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]), the drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C are rotated clockwise and the drive Rotate motors 038SG402C and 038SG402D to the left.

Next, when the parent timer counters A to D time up (parent TCA to TCD = 0), control starts based on the final control data (6000000, &XD_J_LSHKU_STOP[0]) described in the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D. After that, if another operation command (for example, an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command) is received before the parent timer counter times up, the production control CPU 120 Assuming that is established, the operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D036 is ended, and the process moves to operation control based on other operation commands.

In this way, each control data shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26 is divided into a grandchild control data table, a child control data table higher than the grandchild control data table, and a parent control data table higher than the child control data table. By being composed of a data table and a data table, control data used for a series of operations of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D can be set for each of multiple layers.

For example, control data for opening and closing wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are set in the lowest grandchild control data table, and if these openings and closings are to be repeated multiple times, the child control data table is opened. The grandchild control data table corresponding to the closure and the grandchild control data table corresponding to the closure may be written in chronological order. Therefore, when changing part of a series of operations, such as increasing or decreasing the number of opening/closing operations, all that is required is to change the control data in the child control data table, making it easier to respond to problems or design changes.

On the other hand, for example, after sequentially executing multiple pieces of control data written in the grandchild control data table, the operation control based on the final control data may not be completed, or after the operation control based on the final control data has been completed, for some reason. If the transition conditions are not met and the operation control is not based on the control data in the next control data table (for example, if no other operation command is received due to a power outage, error occurrence, noise, etc.) (e.g., when the timer counter in the upper control data table is cleared and the timer does not start up), control based on multiple pieces of control data written in the grandchild control data table becomes a loop and is executed endlessly, causing the drive motor to There is a possibility that 038SG202, 038SG302, and 038SG402A to 038SG402D may suffer from burn-in or other malfunctions.

Therefore, as the final control data written in the grandchild control data table, control data for controlling the drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302, 038SG402A to 038SG402D as drive means for driving the movable bodies so as not to operate is set, and the final control By setting a longer control time than other control data (for example, 6000000ms (100 minutes) or 600000ms (10 minutes)) as the control time of the data, if the specific condition is not satisfied for some reason as described above. Even if the drive motor 038SG202, the drive motor 038SG202, Since 038SG302 and 038SG402A to 038SG402D can be maintained in a stopped state for a long time, control based on multiple pieces of control data written in the grandchild control data table becomes a loop and is repeatedly executed endlessly. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as the control time of the final control data of the lower control data table, the control time for executing the operation control based on the plurality of control data described in the lower control data table is at least described in the upper control data table. It is preferable to set a time that is longer than the control time (time set in the upper timer counter) of the lower control data table.

Even if a long control time is set as the control time for the final control data in the lower control data table, control using the final control data is performed using a control timer ( If a specific condition is met before the timer (upper timer counter) times up (for example, when the upper timer counter times up or receives another operation command), the process ends when the specific condition is met. Therefore, even if control data with a longer control time than other control data is set as the control time of the final control data, the operation control can smoothly transition to the operation control based on the next control data. , the occurrence of defects in the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the control data "MOT_R_Z" used when closing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. 11-22, and the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. The control data based on the extended command D036 shown in FIG. (For example, the extended command D033 is set to be executed in 100 ms, and the extended command D036 is set to be executed in 80 ms).

Furthermore, the control data "MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT" used when opening the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 includes control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. 11-22, control data based on the extended command D036 shown in FIG. 11-24, It is used as common control data for extended commands D033 and 100 ms for extended command D036, and different control times (for example, 100 ms for extended command D033, Command D036 is set to be executed in 80 ms).

As shown in FIG. 11-32(C), the control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CW" used to rotate the rotation parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D to the right is the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. 11-23. control data based on the extended command D036 shown in FIG. 11-25, control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26, and control data based on the extended command D033. When used as control data based on extended command D036, and when used as control data based on extended command D008, different control times (for example, 10970 ms for extended command D033 and 620 ms for extended command D036) , extension command D008 is set to be executed in 2000 ms).

In addition, the control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CCW" used when rotating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D to the left is the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in Figure 11-23 and the extended control data shown in Figure 11-25. It is used as common control data for the control data based on the command D036 and the control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26. Execution is performed with different control times (for example, 11670 ms for extended command D033, 620 ms for extended command D036, and 2000 ms for extended command D008) when used as control data based on extended command D008 and when used as control data based on extended command D008. It is set as follows.

In addition, the control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_STOP" used to stop the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in Figure 11-23 and the extended command shown in Figure 11-25. It is used as common control data for the control data based on D036 and the control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26. When used as control data and when used as control data based on extended command D008, the command is executed with different control times (for example, 2800 ms for extended command D033, 660 ms for extended command D036, and 6000000 ms for extended command D008). is set to .

In this way, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are rotated (first action ) in a second scene (for example, production part SP2-2, etc.), a second movement pattern for rotating (second movement) to correspond to the production display, and a third scene (for example, production part SP2-2, etc.). part SP2-10, etc.), a third movement pattern in which the movable body 32 is rotated (third movement) so as to correspond to the movement of the movable body 32 without corresponding to the rhythm of the effect sound or the effect display, Execute the operation control of the first operation pattern using the first control data table shown in FIG. 11-25, execute the operation control of the second operation pattern using the second control data table shown in FIG. 11-23, Operation control of the third operation pattern is executed using the third control data table shown in FIG. 11-26, and the first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table are all By setting the common control data and the second common control data to be executed at different times, the data capacity can be reduced by realizing a large number of operation patterns through time management while using the common control data. It is possible to improve the interest of the game while reducing the amount of damage.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the deciding performance of the performance part SP2-10 during the execution period of the SP reach performance (strongest) in the SP reach performance B based on the super reach variation pattern of SP reach β. Although the embodiment in which the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production part before the SP reach production (strongest) In N2-0 and the like, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be operated in a third movement pattern based on the extended command D008.

In addition, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are expanded not only in the variable display period based on the super reach variation pattern of SP reach α and β, but also in the variable display period based on the normal reach variation pattern and in the jackpot game state. The third operation pattern based on command D008 may be used.

(Example of cut-in performance)
Next, an example of the production operation of the cut-in production will be explained based on FIGS. 11-33 to 11-34. In FIGS. 11-33, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of cut-in performance based on the performance pattern CP-4, and (B) is a diagram comparing the colors of the character panel LED and the cut-in image. FIGS. 11-34 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the cut-in performance based on the performance pattern CP-4.

In the cut-in performance type execution determination process in 038SGS278, if execution of the cut-in performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 displays images A-1Z~ of allies A-1 to A-4 according to the determined type. Move and display A-4Z toward the position where character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D corresponding to the character to be displayed are provided, and then execute a cut-in effect that operates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. It is possible. Note that the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect.

Here, an example of the effect operation of the effect pattern CP-4 will be explained. When the production control CPU 120 starts the cut-in production of the production pattern CP-4, first, as shown in FIGS. Display cut-in image 038SG601 consisting of a band-shaped effect image 038SG611 extending from the lower right position to the upper left position corresponding to character panel 038SG400A, and an image A-1Z of ally A-1 that overlaps effect image 038SG611. do. Furthermore, in response to the display of the cut-in image 038SG601, the rotation unit 038SG401A starts rotating, and the character panel LED 038SG404A starts lighting in accordance with the rotation.

Next, while the cut-in image 038SG601 is being displayed, after the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401A and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404A are completed, the display area of the image display device 5 is changed as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A3) and (A4). From the band-shaped effect image 038SG621 extending from the lower left position corresponding to character panel 038SG400C to the upper right position corresponding to character panel 038SG400B in 5E, and the image A-2Z of ally A-2 that overlaps with effect image 038SG621. The cut-in image 038SG602 is displayed so as to overlap with the cut-in image 038SG601 in front of the cut-in image 038SG601. Further, in response to the display of the cut-in image 038SG602, the rotation unit 038SG401B starts rotating, and the character panel LED 038SG404B starts lighting in accordance with the rotation.

Next, while the cut-in images 038SG601 and 038SG602 are being displayed, after the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401B and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404B are completed, the image display device 5 is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A5) and (A6). A band-shaped effect image 038SG631 extending from the upper right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400B to the lower left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400C in the display area 5E, and the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 overlapping the effect image 038SG631. A cut-in image 038SG603 consisting of , is displayed so as to overlap with the cut-in image 038SG602 in front of the cut-in image 038SG602. Furthermore, in response to the display of the cut-in image 038SG603, the rotation unit 038SG401C starts rotating, and the character panel LED 038SG404C starts lighting in accordance with the rotation.

Next, while the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603 are displayed, after the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401C and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C are completed, the image display device 5 is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A7) (A8). A band-shaped effect image 038SG641 extending from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A to the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E, and an image A-4Z of the ally A-4 overlapping the effect image 038SG641. A cut-in image 038SG604 consisting of , is displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the cut-in image 038SG603. In addition, in response to the display of the cut-in image 038SG604, the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401D is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the lighting of the character panel LED 038SG404D is started in accordance with the rotation, the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401C is started. The cut-in effect ends by ending the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C.

In addition, in the case of production pattern CP-1, after executing Figures 11-33 (A1) and (A2), the cut-in production is completed by finishing the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401A and the lighting of the character panel LED 038SG404A, and the production is completed. In the case of pattern CP-2, after executing the steps (A1) to (A4) in FIG. 11-33, the cut-in effect is completed by finishing the rotation of the rotating part 038SG401B and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404B, and the cut-in effect is completed, and the effect pattern CP In the case of -3, after executing steps (A1) to (A6) in FIG. 11-33, the cut-in effect ends by ending the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401C and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C.

As shown in FIG. 11-33(B), the emission color (for example, blue) of the character panel LED038SG404A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A and the display color (for example, blue) of the cut-in image 038SG601 displayed corresponding to this character panel 038SG400A For example, the display color (blue-based display color) is a common blue (blue-based color). Also, what is the luminescent color (for example, yellow) of the character panel LED038SG404B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B and the display color (for example, yellow-based display color) of the cut-in image 038SG602 displayed corresponding to this character panel 038SG400B? , is considered to be a common yellow color (yellow-based color). Also, what is the emission color (for example, green) of the character panel LED038SG404C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C and the display color (for example, green-based display color) of the cut-in image 038SG603 displayed corresponding to this character panel 038SG400C? , is considered to be a common green color (green color). In addition, the emission color of the character panel LED038SG404D of the character panel 038SG400D at the lower right (for example, red) and the display color of the cut-in image 038SG604 displayed corresponding to this character panel 038SG400D (for example, a red-based display color) is considered to be a common red color (red color).

Therefore, the relevance between the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 can be enhanced. Note that, although here, an example is given in which the emission color of the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 have a common color system, the present invention is not limited to this. , the display color of the print layer constituting the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and the display color of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 may be a common color system.

Next, detailed display operation modes of cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 will be described based on FIG. 11-34. Although cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 differ in the display position and display mode of character images and effect images, the display operation mode is almost the same, so below, the display operation mode of cut-in image 038SG604 will be explained. A description of the display operation mode of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603 will be omitted. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, illustration of cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603 displayed in lower display layers is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-34(A), when starting the moving display of the cut-in image 038SG604, the production control CPU 120 moves the band-shaped effect image 038SG641 to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. After being displayed in the frame from the corresponding upper left position, the width expands while extending toward the lower right position corresponding to character panel 038SG400D, as shown in Figures 11-34 (B), (C), and (D). Move and display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-34(E), the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 is displayed in the frame from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. , as shown in FIGS. 11-34(F), (G), and (H), the effect image 038SG641 is moved and displayed toward the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D while being overlapped and displayed on the front side.

Then, in response to displaying the moving image A-4Z of the ally A-4 out of frame from the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the other rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401C is stopped, the other character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404C are left off, and the rotating part 038SG401D starts rotating, and the character panel LED 038SG404D starts lighting in accordance with the rotation.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 moves and displays the cut-in image 038SG604 toward the character panel 038SG400D corresponding to the ally A-4 of the image A-4Z that constitutes the cut-in image 038SG604, and then displays the cut-in image 038SG604. Since the rotating part 038SG401D of the panel 038SG400D starts rotating, it is possible to realize a cut-in effect in which the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 and the rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D are linked.

(Characteristic part 038SG modification example 1)
Next, the first modification of the characteristic portion 038SG will be described based on FIG. 11-35. FIGS. 11-35 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the cut-in production as the first modification of the characteristic portion 038SG.

In the feature section 038SG, cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and then the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are rotated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after rotating the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 corresponding to the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are created by rotating the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. The display may be moved in a direction away from the current position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35(A), for example, when starting the moving display of the cut-in image 038SG601, the production control CPU 120 stops the rotating parts 038SG401B to 038SG401D, and stops the character panel LEDs 038SG404B to 038SG404D. With the light turned off, the rotating part 038SG401A corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A starts rotating, and as shown in FIG. 11-35(B), the band-shaped effect image 038SG611 is moved to After frame-in display is performed from the upper left position corresponding to character panel 038SG400A in display area 5E of display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 11-35(C) and (D), from the upper left position corresponding to character panel 038SG400A. Move and display so that the width dimension expands while extending in the direction of separation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35(E), the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A is moved from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. After displaying in the frame, as shown in Figures 11-35 (F), (G), and (H), the direction away from the upper left position corresponding to character panel 038SG400A remains overlapped and displayed in front of effect image 038SG611. Move and display the image.

Then, after displaying the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 to be moved and displayed out of frame from the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401A and the character panel Finish lighting the LED038SG404A.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 starts rotating the rotation unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A corresponding to the cut-in image 038SG601, and then moves and displays the cut-in image 038SG601 in the direction away from the character panel 038SG400A. You may also do so. By doing so, it is possible to realize a cut-in effect in which the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 and the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A are linked.

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 038SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance control by controlling the performance of the wing in response to the rhythm of the performance sound in the performance parts SP2-6 to SP2-8 of the SP reach performance B. When operating 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in conjunction with each other, or sequentially enlarging and displaying images A-1Z to A-4Z in production part SP2-2 of SP reach production B, it is possible to correspond to the enlarged display. It is possible to individually rotate the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D. When an extended command for movable body control is received from the display control unit 123, the wing 038SG221, For control data that can execute operation control of 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and is different from the final control data in each control data table, a control timer (for example, When the parent timer counter (parent TC), child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandchild TC), etc.) is timed up, the control data is changed to the next control data, and the control using each control data ends. On the other hand, if a specific condition described below is satisfied before the control timer capable of timing the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up, the control based on the final control data is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied. let In other words, the first control data table (see Figures 11-24 and 11-25) is made up of control data for performing actions corresponding to the sound effects, and the second control data table is made up of control data for performing actions corresponding to specific displays. In both of the control data tables (see Figures 11-22 and 11-23), the final control data is the final control data when a specific condition is met before the period set in the final control data is timed. Data becomes unusable.
By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of SP reach effect B by the operation of wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and if a specific condition is satisfied during control based on the final control data, the control ends. Therefore, in order to respond to malfunctions such as abnormal operation of wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, the control period is long as the final control data that controls the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D not to operate. Since it becomes possible to use the control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of operational malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

In particular, during the execution period of a series of performances with a storyline such as SP reach production (strongest), the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, etc. , the operation control based on one control data table may change from the operation control based on the other control data table due to any of the factors mentioned above (e.g., the occurrence of a power outage, the occurrence of an error, the influence of noise, etc.) If the movement control based on the control data written in the first control data table is repeatedly executed, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D will not be able to respond to the rhythm of the performance sound or the display of character images. However, by using control data with a long control period as the final control data, it is possible for the player to experience a problem with the operation in situations where the control data table is not used. The operation control based on the final control data is terminated when a specific condition is met, and the operation control based on the final control data is terminated when a specific condition is met, and the operation control based on the final control data is performed repeatedly. control.

In addition, for example, when the child timer counter A times up (child TCA=0), the production control CPU 120 checks the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter does not time up (parent TC>0), the CPU 120 specifies Assuming that the condition is satisfied, control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821B and 038SG821D described in the child control data table 038SG822A is executed in order.
By doing this, by controlling multiple grandchild control data tables with the upper child control data table, you can partially change the series of actions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Since it is only necessary to change the grandchild control data table, it becomes easier to deal with problems that occur. Furthermore, since control data with a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

In addition, when the child timer counter has timed up (grandchild TCA>0, child TC=0), the production control CPU 120 checks the parent timer counter, and if the parent timer counter has not timed up (parent TC>0). ), and when the specific condition is met, the next page of the child control data table 038SG802 is displayed according to the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched from SP2-3A to SP2-3B). Shift to (change) the control data described in .
By doing this, by controlling multiple grandchild control data tables with the upper child control data table, you can partially change the series of actions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Since it is only necessary to change the grandchild control data table, it becomes easier to deal with problems that occur. Furthermore, since control data with a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

Further, the plurality of control data tables are first control data tables (for example, grandchild control data tables 038SG801A, 038SG801B, 038SG821A to 038SG821D, etc.) and control data tables higher than the first control data table, and A second control data table (for example, child control data tables 038SG802, 038SG822A to 038SG822C, etc.) in which a control period in which the first control data table is used and a storage address of the first control data table are defined; A third control data table (for example, , parent control data tables 038SG803, 038SG823, etc.), and the control data of the first control data table includes a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one step operation, an operation upper limit, is determined.
By doing this, by controlling the lower-level grandchild control data table with the higher-level child control data table, when partially changing the series of actions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, the lower-level Since all you have to do is change the grandchild control data table, it becomes easier to deal with problems that occur.

Further, the final control data of the grandchild control data table, child control data table, and parent control data table have a period longer than any control data different from the final control data, and the same special control period (for example, 6000000ms (100 minutes), 600000ms (10 minutes), etc.) are set.
By doing this, it becomes possible to use control data with a long control period as the final control data for each level, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. .

In addition, during the first performance period (for example, performance part SP2-1), the rotation part 038SG401A to 038SG401D do not operate and during the second production period (for example, production parts SP2-2 to SP2-3), the movable body control information common to wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D (for example, By setting the extension command D033, etc., special control using control data according to the control information for the movable body is executed, and in the special control, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are set. Wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 do not operate from the start of the second performance period, but operate after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start (for example, from the performance part SP2-3). Wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 open and close).
By doing this, the movable body control information is not set during the performance period in which the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are not operated, such as the first performance period, and during the second performance period, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panel 038SG400A By setting the movable body control information common to 038SG400D, stable operation can be achieved.

Also, when operating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D individually, the parent control data table 038SG813A for operating the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A and the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B are operated. Parent control data table 038SG813B for operating, parent control data table 038SG813C for operating rotation unit 038SG401C of character panel 038SG400C, and parent control data table 038SG813D for operating rotation unit 038SG401D of character panel 038SG400D, respectively. On the other hand, when operating the rotating parts 038SG401A, 038SG401C and the rotating parts 038SG401B, 038SG401D in common, the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A is set in the parent control data table 038SG833. By being set, the rotating part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C will also rotate together, and the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B will be set in the parent control data table 038SG843. , the rotating part 038SG401D of the lower right character panel 038SG400D also rotates together. By doing so, individual control data is used when operating individually, and only one control data is used when operating in common, so that data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the SP reach performance A until the deciding performance is started. By doing this, in SP ready-to-win performance B, the actions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, which are not executed in SP ready-to-win performance A, are executed, thereby increasing expectations for the jackpot state.

In addition, when notifying that the performance will be controlled to a jackpot game state in the deciding performance in SP reach performance B and SP reach performance A, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. The rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate. By doing this, in SP reach effect A, wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D do not operate until the deciding effect, but when notifying that the jackpot game state will be controlled, SP reach effect A Since they perform common actions, it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D to correspond to the rhythm of the production sound in the SP reach production (strongest) of production parts SP2-1 to SP2-11 of SP reach production B. a first action pattern that causes a first action to occur, a second action pattern that causes a second action to correspond to the effect display, and a third action pattern that causes a third action that is different from the first action and the second action. The first control data table (for example, the control data shown in FIG. 11-25) is used to execute the operation control of the first operation pattern (see FIG. 11-30), and the second The operation control of the second operation pattern is executed using a control data table (for example, the control data shown in FIG. 11-23) (see FIG. 11-28), and the third control data table (for example, the control data shown in FIG. 11-26) is executed. The operation control of the third operation pattern is executed using the control data shown in FIG. 11-31 (see FIG. 11-31). Common first common control data (for example, control data for clockwise rotation "&XD_J_LSHKU_CW") and second common control data (for example, control data for counterclockwise rotation "&XD_J_LSHKU_CCW") are used at different control times.
In this way, by using common control data and realizing a large number of movement patterns through time management, it is possible to reduce data capacity and improve the interest of the game.

In detail, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are operated in a first movement pattern corresponding to the rhythm of the effect sound, a second movement pattern corresponding to the effect display, and a third movement pattern corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32. Even when setting multiple control data to operate in different operation patterns, the control data for basic operations such as rotating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D clockwise, counterclockwise, and stopping rotation can be set as common control data. , it is possible to realize a large number of motion patterns simply by setting the control time according to each motion pattern, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design while reducing data capacity.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can operate the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, and the third operation pattern in the SP reach effect (strongest) of the SP reach effect B. Since the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated in a variety of patterns in one performance, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008 in the performance part N2-0 before the SP reach performance (strongest). By making it possible to operate, it is possible to reduce the amount of data and increase the interest of the game in a variety of situations.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the fall of the movable body 32 based on the operation control execution data of the process data, regardless of displaying images on the image display device 5 or outputting sounds. By being able to execute motion control based on the third motion pattern, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation validity period of the chance button 631B, or the operation is valid when the operation of the chance button 631B is not detected. By being able to perform the determined performance at the end of the period and execute the operation control based on the third operation pattern of rotating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in synchronization with the timing of moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D all at once in the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, while individually rotating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the second operation pattern. By doing so, each of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated individually in accordance with the effect display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a cut-in effect, the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 toward the position where the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is provided, and then rotates the character panel 038SG400A. The first predetermined effect is to operate the rotation section 038SG401A, and the image A-2Z of ally A-2 is moved and displayed toward the position where the rotation section 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is installed, and then the rotation section 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is moved. A second predetermined effect is performed, and the image A-3Z of ally A-3 is moved and displayed toward the position where the rotating section 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is provided, and then the rotating section 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is operated. A third predetermined effect can be executed.
By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a plurality of cut-in performances in which the character display and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are linked.

Furthermore, as a cut-in effect, the production control CPU 120 operates the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, and then moves the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 from the position where the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is provided. A first predetermined effect of displaying movement in the direction of separation, and after operating the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B, moving the image A-2Z of ally A-2 to the position where the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is provided. A second predetermined effect is provided in which the character panel 038SG400C moves and is displayed in a direction away from the character panel 038SG400C, and the rotating unit 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C operates the image A-3Z of the ally A-3. It is possible to perform a third predetermined effect in which the image is displayed moving in a direction away from the position.
By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a plurality of cut-in performances in which the character display and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are linked.

Furthermore, for example, when executing a cut-in effect based on the effect patterns CP-3 and CP-4, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotation unit 038SG401A and turns the character panel LED038SG404A while displaying the cut-in image 038SG601. After the lighting is finished, the cut-in image 038SG602 is displayed so as to overlap the cut-in image 038SG601 in front of the cut-in image 038SG601, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A3) and (A4). By doing this, when the display of the cut-in image 038SG602 is started, the rotation of the rotation unit 038SG401A that was operated in the display of the cut-in image 038SG601 is stopped, so that attention is drawn to the display of the cut-in image 038SG602. Can be done.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a notification that the variable display result has become a jackpot or a miss in the performance part SP2-11 after executing the cut-in performance in the performance part SP2-9. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's expectations before notifying that the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

As a cut-in effect, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on which of Pattern CP-1, Pattern CP-2, Pattern CP-3, and Pattern CP-4 is executed, that is, Pattern CP-1 and Pattern CP-1. By having different jackpot expectations for CP-2, pattern CP-3, and pattern CP-4, it is possible to draw attention to the number of displayed cut-in images that will be executed.

In addition, the visibility of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D is higher when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are in the open state than when they are in the closed state, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the movement of each of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D rather than the opening and closing operations of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321.

Furthermore, the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A and the image A-1Z have a common blue color, the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B and the image A-2Z have a common yellow color, and the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C By being green, which is the same color as image A-3Z, it is possible to enhance the relationship between each of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D and each of images A-1Z to A-4Z.

In addition, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned off when the corresponding rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are in the non-operating state, and can be turned on when the corresponding rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are in the operating state. It is possible to make parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D stand out.

Furthermore, the effect images 038SG611 to 038SG631 gradually become wider in the direction in which images A-1Z to A-4Z are moved and displayed, and extend in the same direction as the direction in which images A-1Z to A-4Z are moved and displayed. By displaying the images A-1Z to A-4Z in this manner, the effect images 038SG611 to 038SG631 corresponding to the moving display of each image A-1Z to A-4Z can suitably enhance the feeling of interlocking with the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D.

Although the characteristic part 038SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. are also included in the present invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In the characteristic part 038SG, the wing 038SG221 and 038SG321 are applied as the first movable body, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied as the second movable body, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 may be applied as the second movable bodies, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be applied as the first movable bodies. The movable body 32, the elevating body 038SG121 of the first effect unit 038SG100 provided in the opening/closing door frame 50, etc. may be applied, and various changes are possible.

In addition, in the characteristic part 038SG, as a specific performance in which a performance sound is output and the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in conjunction with each other in accordance with the rhythm of the performance sound, the performance part SP2-6 of SP reach performance B is output. ~ Although the configuration in which the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated in accordance with the rhythm (sound effect) of the production sound (BGM) output in SP2-8 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, but as long as the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in accordance with the rhythm of the production sound, for example, the sound effect (large) is output after the sound effect (small) is output. The wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D may be operated in conjunction until the sound effect is output, that is, at a timing when the sound effect is not output. That is, as long as the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in conjunction with each other in a predetermined rhythm, they may be operated in conjunction with each other at a timing other than the output timing of the sound effect (beat).

Furthermore, in the feature section 038SG, a mode is exemplified in which a sound effect (beat) is output at a predetermined rhythm during a period when the BGM of a song is continuously output, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the BGM is not continuously output, it is sufficient if the sound effect (beat) is output at a predetermined rhythm.

Also, to operate the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) in conjunction means to operate the first movable body and the second movable body at the same timing and over the same period of time. However, the first movable body and the second movable body may have different operation start timings, operation end timings, and operation periods as long as they are operated in accordance with the rhythm. Furthermore, if at least one of the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can operate in accordance with the rhythm of the performance sound, it is not necessarily the first movable body. It is not necessary for the second movable body to operate in conjunction with the second movable body.

In addition, in the characteristic section 038SG, as an example of causing the second movable body to perform a specific operation different from the interlocking operation at a specific time when a special image is displayed on the display means in a specific production, the production control CPU 120 controls the SP reach. In the production part SP2-2 of production B, during the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of each image A-1Z to A-4Z as special images, the enlarged images A-1Z to A-4Z are displayed as special images. Although a configuration in which the rotation units 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to A-4Z are individually rotated is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation from one image (for example, image A-4Z) to another image ( For example, rotation of the rotation units 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to one image or another image may be started in synchronization with the timing of switching display to A-3Z). In other words, if the operation is different from the interlocking operation of the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG32) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D), the operation mode will be adjusted according to the display of the special image as described above. The present invention is not limited to one that operates based on the display of a special image, and may operate regardless of the display of a special image.

Further, in the characteristic part 038SG, production parts such as production parts SP2-6 to SP2-8, production part SP2-2, production part SP2-10 are applied as examples of the first scene, second scene, and third scene. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one frame (direction screen) constituting one performance part, such as SP2-6A, SP2-6B, SP2-6C, During the execution period of SP Reach production (battle showdown or fortress destruction), a series of shots (production scenes) that are grouped together at the same time, same place, same action, etc. may be applied, and each scene can be The configured period and the like can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 038SG, a plurality of control data tables (for example, a lower control data table (grandchild control data table)) constituted by control data are used as operation control data for operating the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating sections 038SG401A to 038SG401D. and an intermediate control data table (which is a control data table higher than the lower control data table), in which a control period in which the lower control data table is used and a storage address of the upper control data table are defined. a child control data table) and a control data table higher than the intermediate control data table, in which a control period in which the intermediate control data table is used and a storage address of the intermediate control data table are determined. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more control data tables of different hierarchies are set. or one control data table may be set.Furthermore, as long as control data is set, no control data table is necessarily set.Furthermore, at least one control data table may be set. It does not necessarily have to be made up of a plurality of control data as long as it is made up of control data.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 038SG, the control time of the final control data among the plurality of control data is set to, for example, 6,000,000 ms (100 minutes) or 600,000 ms (10 minutes), but the present invention The control time is not limited to this, and a length of control time other than the above may be set.

Furthermore, in the feature section 038SG, a configuration is exemplified in which a common control time such as 6,000,000 ms (100 minutes) or 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is set as the control time for a plurality of final control data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different control times may be set as the control times for each final control data.

In addition, in the feature section 038SG, the performance control CPU 120 sets a specific condition that triggers the end of the control based on the final control data before the control timer that can time the control period in which the final control data is used times up. As an example of establishment, a timer counter (e.g., child TC ) has been exemplified in which the timer is up and other operation commands (for example, operation commands based on process data and operation commands based on other extended commands) are applied; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the production control board 12 may receive control information output from the main board 11 (for example, a background designation command or a gaming state designation command), or commands, game state designation commands, etc.), or regardless of the reception of the control information, the effect images and effects displayed during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing control based on the final control data. It may also include switching and displaying background images, displaying special effect images, outputting effect sound effects and special sounds, etc.

Further, in the characteristic part 038SG, control data for stopping or turning off the drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302 and the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D is used as final control data for controlling the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D so as not to operate them. , the control data for operating the drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302 and the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D little by little is set, but the final control data for controlling the movable body so that it does not operate completely controls the motion of the movable body. It may be control data that causes the robot to stop, or, for example, it may be control data that causes the amount of operation per predetermined time to be smaller than normal.

Further, in the characteristic section 038SG, the display control section 123 generates the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and generates the image data. When performing display processing to output image data as a video signal, that is, when displaying image data on the image display device 5, an example has been given in which an extended command is generated and transmitted to the production control CPU 120. The extended command is not limited to the timing at which the display control unit 123 draws an image in the image drawing area in the VRAM area, or the purpose of displaying the drawn image on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area. The image data may be output at the timing when it is generated.

In addition, in the feature section 038SG, the production control CPU 120 can execute operation control to operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating sections 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on receiving the extended command output from the display control section 123. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled based only on the motion control execution data set in the process data, without using extended commands. You may also make it work.

In addition, in the characteristic part 038SG, the production control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the fourth movable pattern in some production parts regardless of reception of the extension command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D may all be executable based on reception of the extension command. Furthermore, it may be possible to control the operations of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D in production parts other than those described above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 038SG, although the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied as special movable bodies, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 may be applied, the movable body 32 provided in the game area, the elevating body 038SG121 of the first performance unit 038SG100 provided in the opening/closing door frame 50, etc. may be applied, and various changes are possible.

In addition, in the characteristic part 038SG, as a third operation pattern that performs a third operation different from the first operation and the second operation, a third operation is performed in which the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated in accordance with the falling operation of the movable body 32. Although an example is shown in which a pattern is applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is an operation pattern that causes an operation different from display adjustment or sound adjustment, it can be applied to the operation control execution data set in the process data. A fourth operation pattern based on the above may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 038SG, the opening and closing operations of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotation of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied as the operations of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the special movable body. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of these movable bodies can be changed in various ways, and is not limited to opening/closing or rotation, but may also be sliding movement or deformation movement.

In the characteristic portion 038SG and modification example 1, after moving and displaying the effect images 038SG611 to 038SG641 forming the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604, the images A-1Z to A-4Z forming the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are displayed. By moving and displaying , it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the moving display of images A-1Z to A-4Z of allies A-1 to A-4.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 038SG and modification 1, after moving and displaying the effect images 038SG611, 038SG621, 038SG631, and 038SG641 forming the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604, the ally A-1 forming the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 Although the embodiment in which the images A-1Z to A-4Z of ~A-4 are moved and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect images 038SG611, 038SG621, 038SG631, 038SG641 and allies A-1~ Images A-1Z to A-4Z of A-4 may be displayed while moving together.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 038SG and the first modification, the width dimension of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 is increased while extending toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D or away from the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or are moved to the corresponding character panels 038SG400A. ~038SG400D may be moved and displayed while extending in the direction away from the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D without enlarging the width, or it may be displayed in the direction away from the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or in the direction away from the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. The display may be moved so that the width dimension decreases while expanding.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 038SG and modification example 1, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are displayed as moving toward or away from the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 of a predetermined size are directed to the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are directed to the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. 038SG400D may be moved and displayed without being stretched in the direction away from 038SG400D.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 038SG and modification 1, the positions where the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are provided and the positions corresponding to the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D refer to the characters in the display area where the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 can be displayed. It is preferable that the position is near the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, but it is not necessarily a position near the corresponding character panel as long as it is closer to the corresponding character panel than other character panels that do not correspond to one cut-in image. Good too.

In addition, in the feature section 038SG and the first modification, cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are composed of a character image and an effect image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and character images Alternatively, it may be composed of only one of the effect images, or may include images other than the character image and the effect image.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player include not only jackpot playing states, variable probability states, and time saving states, but also small winning playing states, reach states, pseudo-continuous performance states, pending consecutive states, and chance states. Variable display results, controls, and effects may be included, such as close-up effect, pre-read preview effect, time-saving on/off, ceiling time-saving control to be described later. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winnings, assist time (AT) winnings, replay time (RT) winnings, bonus winnings, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the feature section 038SG, as a pachinko game machine, a so-called 1 type 2 type game machine is applied which can be controlled to a jackpot game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it may be a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game, and the playability can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that variably displays production identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display;
a first movable body corresponding to the first character display; a second movable body provided at a different position from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display; the first movable body and the second movable body. a plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display;
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance after the variable display of the performance identification information becomes a ready state;
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the first character toward a position where the first movable body is provided, and then operating the first movable body;
a second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the second character toward a position where the second movable body is provided, and then operating the second movable body;
a third predetermined effect of moving and displaying the third character toward a position where the third movable body is provided, and then operating the third movable body;
is executable,
A case where the first predetermined effect is executed but the second predetermined effect and the third predetermined effect are not executed, and a case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed but the third predetermined effect The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different depending on when the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed.
The operations performed by the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body in the predetermined performance are the same,
The first movable body and the first character display have a common first color, the second movable body and the second character display have a common second color, and the third movable body and the second character display have a common first color. 3-character display is a common third color,
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine that variably displays production identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display;
a first movable body corresponding to the first character display; a second movable body provided at a different position from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display; the first movable body and the second movable body. a plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display;
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance after the variable display of the performance identification information becomes a ready state;
Equipped with
The predetermined performance execution means is
a first predetermined effect of operating the first movable body and then moving and displaying the first character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the first movable body;
a second predetermined effect of operating the second movable body and then moving and displaying the second character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the second movable body;
a third predetermined effect of operating the third movable body and then moving and displaying the third character display in a direction away from a position corresponding to the third movable body;
is executable,
A case where the first predetermined effect is executed but the second predetermined effect and the third predetermined effect are not executed, and a case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed but the third predetermined effect The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different depending on when the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed.
The operations performed by the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body in the predetermined performance are the same,
The first movable body and the first character display have a common first color, the second movable body and the second character display have a common second color, and the third movable body and the second character display have a common first color. 3-character display is a common third color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images